Just Give Me The Damn Manual*[PI00560(ALL)05/95] Table of Contents Introductory Information...

[PI00080( T)04/95]

thirty-six pica chart:

File:01fcpit.exUpdate:Mon Jan 22 15:39:52 1996

*[PI00100(ALL)09/95]

thirty-six pica chart:


*[PI00560(ALL)05/95]

Table of Contents

Introductory Information ............................. 1

Safety Restraints ............................................ 9

Starting Your Taurus .................................. 59

Warning Lights and Gauges ..................... 71

Instrument Panel Controls ........................ 91

Steering Column Controls ...................... 115

Features ........................................................ 125

Electronic Sound Systems ....................... 169

Driving Your Taurus ................................ 191

Roadside Emergencies .............................. 217

Customer Assistance ................................. 237

Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 244

Accessories .................................................. 249

Servicing Your Taurus ............................. 255

Quick Index ................................................ 341

Index ............................................................. 357

Service Station Information .................... 380


1

Introductory Information

*[IN00300(ALL)04/95] Ford’s Commitment to You

*[IN00400(ALL)10/95] At Ford Motor Company, excellence is thecontinuous commitment to achieve the bestresult possible. It is dedication to learning whatyou want, determination to develop the rightconcept, and execution of that concept with care,precision, and attention to detail. In short,excellence means being the standard by whichothers are judged.

*[IN00500(ALL)04/95] Our Guiding Principles

*[IN00600(ALL)04/95] ❑Quality comes first. For your satisfaction, thequality of our products and services must beour number one priority.

*[IN00700(ALL)04/95] ❑You are the focus of everything we do. Ourwork must be done with you in mind,providing better products and services thanour competition.

*[IN00750(ALL)04/95] ❑Continuous improvement is essential to oursuccess. We must strive for excellence ineverything we do: in our products — in theirsafety and value — and in our services, ourhuman relations, our competitiveness, andour profitability.

*[IN00800(ALL)04/95] ❑Employee involvement is our way of life.We are a team. We must treat one anotherwith trust and respect.

*[IN00900(ALL)04/95] ❑Dealers and suppliers are our partners. Wemust maintain mutually beneficialrelationships with dealers, suppliers, and ourother business associates.

File:02fcint.exUpdate:Mon Jan 22 15:41:04 1996

2

*[IN01000(ALL)04/95] ❑ Integrity is never compromised. Our conductworldwide must be pursued in a manner thatis socially responsible and commands respectfor its integrity and for its positivecontributions to society.

*[IN01100(ALL)08/95] Things to Know About UsingThis Guide

*[IN01200(ALL)08/95] Congratulations on the purchase of your newvehicle. This guide has information about theequipment and the options for your new vehicle.You may not have bought all of the optionsavailable to you. If you do not know whichinformation applies to your vehicle, talk to yourdealer.

*[IN01300(ALL)08/95] This guide describes equipment and givesspecifications for equipment that was in effectwhen this guide was approved for printing. Fordmay discontinue models or change specificationsor design without any notice and withoutincurring obligation.

*[IN01400(ALL)07/95] NOTES and WARNINGS

*[IN01420(ALL)05/95] NOTES give you additional information aboutthe subject matter you are referencing.

*[IN01440(ALL)05/95] WARNINGS remind you to be especially carefulin those areas where carelessness can causedamage to your vehicle or personal injury toyourself, your passengers or other people. Pleaseread all WARNINGS carefully.

*[IN01460(ALL)05/95] RWARNING


3

*[IN01500(ALL)08/95] Finding Information in This Guide

*[IN01600(ALL)04/95] After you have read this guide once, you willprobably return to it when you have a specificquestion or need additional information. To helpyou find specific information quickly, you canuse the Quick Index or the Index.

*[IN01700(ALL)08/95] The Quick Index at the end of the bookprovides a page number following each itemwhich indicates where detailed information canbe found.

*[IN01900(ALL)08/95] To use the Index, turn to the back of the bookand search in the alphabetical listing for theword that best describes the information youneed. If the word you chose is not listed, thinkof other related words and look them up. Wehave designed the Index so that you can findinformation under a technical term.

%*[IN02000(ALL)08/95] Canadian Owners — French Version

*[IN02100(ALL)08/95] French Owner Guides can be obtained from yourdealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company ofCanada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3.

%*[IN02400(ALL)04/95] Your Maintenance Schedule andRecord Booklet

*[IN02500(ALL)03/95] The Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet liststhe services that are most important for keepingyour vehicle in good condition. A record log isalso provided to help you keep track of allservices performed.


4

%*[IN02600(ALL)01/95] About the Warranties

*[IN02700(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is covered by three types ofwarranties: Basic Vehicle Warranty, ExtendedWarranties on certain parts, and EmissionsWarranties.

%*[IN03100(ALL)03/95] Read your Warranty Information Booklet carefullyto find out about your vehicle’s warranties andyour basic rights and responsibilities.

*[IN03300(ALL)03/95] If you lose your Warranty Information Booklet, youcan get a new one free of charge. Contact anyFord or Lincoln-Mercury dealer, or refer to theaddresses and phone numbers on the first pageof this owner guide.

%*[IN04000(ALL)01/95] Buying a Ford Extended Service Plan

*[IN04100(ALL)01/94] If you bought your vehicle in the U.S., you canbuy a Ford Extended Service Plan for yourvehicle. This optional contract provides serviceprotection for a longer period of time than thebasic warranty that comes with your vehicle.

*[IN04200(ALL)01/95] You do not have to buy this option when youbuy your vehicle. However, your option topurchase the Ford Extended Service Plan runsout after 18 months or 18,000 miles. See yourdealer for more details about the Ford ExtendedService Plan.

*[IN04250(ALL)01/95] If you purchased a Canadian vehicle and did nottake advantage of the Ford Extended ServicePlan at the time of purchase, you may still beeligible. See your dealer for the details.


5

%*[IN06000(ALL)01/95] Breaking Your Vehicle In*[IN06100(ALL)03/95] Your new vehicle goes through an adjustment or

break-in period during the first 1,000 miles(1,600 km) that you drive it. During the break-inperiod, you need to pay careful attention to howyou drive your vehicle.

%*[IN06300(ALL)01/95] ❑Avoid sudden stops. Because your vehiclehas new brake linings, you should take thesesteps:

*[IN06400(ALL)01/95] — Watch traffic carefully so that you cananticipate when to stop.

*[IN06500(ALL)01/95] — Begin braking well in advance.

*[IN06600(ALL)01/95] — Apply the brakes gradually.

*[IN06700(ALL)01/95] The break-in period for new brake liningslasts for 100 miles (160 km) of city driving or1,000 miles (1,600 km) of highway driving.

%*[IN06800(ALL)01/95] ❑Use only the type of engine oil that Fordrecommends. See Engine oil recommendationsin the Index. Do not use special “break-in”oils.

[IN06810(ALL)04/95] Safety Labels[IN06820(ALL)04/95] There are labels, decals and tags on your vehicle

to alert you about possible hazards. The signalword on the label tells you the degree of hazardand is used in the following ways:

[IN06830(ALL)04/95] ❑DANGER: Used to indicate the presence of ahazard which will cause severe personalinjury or death if the warning is ignored.

[IN06840(ALL)04/95] ❑WARNING: Used to indicate the presence ofa hazard which can cause severe personalinjury or death if the warning is ignored.

[IN06850(ALL)04/95] ❑CAUTION: Used to indicate the presence of ahazard which will or can cause minorpersonal injury or property damage if thewarning is ignored.


6

%*[IN06900(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Outside of YourVehicle

*[IN07001(ALL)07/95] Pollen, bird droppings and tree sap can damagethe paint, especially in hot weather. Wash yourvehicle as often as necessary to keep it clean.

*[IN07101(ALL)07/95] Take similar precautions if your vehicle isexposed to chemical industrial fallout.

*[IN07201(ALL)07/95] Paint damage resulting from fallout is notrelated to a defect in paint materials orworkmanship and therefore is not covered bywarranty. Ford, however, believes that continualimprovement in customer satisfaction is a highpriority. For this reason, Ford has authorized itsdealers to repair, at no charge to the owner, thesurfaces of new vehicles damaged byenvironmental fallout within 12 months or 12,000miles (20,000 km) of purchase, whichever comesfirst. Customers may be required to bring theirvehicle in for inspection by a Fordrepresentative.

%*[IN07301(ALL)04/95] Washing and Polishing Your Vehicle

[IN07401(ALL)03/95] Wash the outside of your vehicle, including theunderside, with a cleaner made for washing cars.If your vehicle has clear-coat, make sure that thecleaner is recommended for clear-coat.

*[IN07501(ALL)06/95] DO NOT:

*[IN07601(ALL)04/95] ❑Wash your vehicle with hot water

*[IN07701(ALL)04/95] ❑Wash your vehicle while it sits in directsunlight

*[IN07801(ALL)04/95] ❑Wash your vehicle while the body is hot

*[IN07901(ALL)04/95] Polish your vehicle to remove harmful depositsand protect the finish.


7

%*[IN08101(ALL)04/95] Cleaning Chrome and Aluminum Parts

*[IN08201(ALL)04/95] Wash chrome and aluminum parts with a milddetergent. Do not use steel wool, abrasivecleaners, fuel or strong detergents.

%*[IN08301(ALL)04/95] Cleaning Plastic Parts

*[IN08401(ALL)04/95] Some of your vehicle’s exterior trim parts areplastic. Clean with a tar and road oil remover ifnecessary. Use a vinyl cleaner for routinecleaning.

*[IN08501(ALL)04/95] Do not clean plastic parts with thinners, solventsor petroleum-based cleaners.

%*[IN08701(ALL)04/95] If you have your vehicle rustproofed, removeoversprayed rustproofing with a tar and road oilremover. If rustproofing is not removed fromplastic and rubber parts, it can causedeterioration.


9

Safety Restraints

%*[SR00500(ALL)04/95] Important Safety Belt Information

*[SR00600(ALL)03/95] The use of safety belts helps to restrain you andyour passengers in case of a collision. In moststates and in Canada the law requires their use.

*[SR00700(ALL)08/95] Safety belts provide best restraint when:

*[SR00800(ALL)08/95] ❑ the seatback is upright

*[SR00900(ALL)08/95] ❑ the occupant is sitting upright (not slouched)

*[SR01000(ALL)08/95] ❑ the lap belt is snug and low on the hips

*[SR01100(ALL)08/95] ❑ the shoulder belt is snug against the chest

*[SR01200(ALL)08/95] ❑ the knees are straight forward

*[SR02200(ALL)07/95] To help you remember to fasten your safety belt,a warning light may come on and a chime maysound. See Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime inthe Warning Lights and Gauges chapter.

*[SR02300(ALL)07/95] See the following sections in this chapter fordirections on how to properly use these safetybelts. Also see Safety Restraints for Children in thischapter for special instructions about usingsafety belts for children.

File:03fcsrt.exUpdate:Mon Jan 22 15:46:18 1996

10

*[SR02350(ALL)12/95] RWARNING

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

%*[SR02400(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Make sure that you and your passengerswear safety belts. Always drive and ridewith your seatback upright and the lapbelt snug and low across the hips.


Never wear the shoulder belt under thearm. Never swing it around the neck overthe inside shoulder. Never use a singlebelt for more than one person or acrossmore than one seating position. Eachseating position in your vehicle has aspecific safety belt assembly which ismade up of one buckle and one tonguethat are designed to be used as a pair.Failure to follow these precautions couldincrease the risk and/or severity of injuryin a collision.


11


Ford recommends that all safety beltassemblies and attaching hardware shouldbe inspected by a qualified technicianafter any collision. Safety belt assembliesnot in use during a collision should alsobe inspected and replaced if eitherdamage or improper operation is noted.


To reduce the risk of serious injury in acollision, children should always ride withthe seatback upright.


Never let a passenger hold a child on hisor her lap while the vehicle is moving.The passenger cannot protect the childfrom injury in a collision.


Lock the doors of your vehicle beforedriving to lessen the risk of the doorcoming open in a collision.


12

%*[SR03600(ALL)05/95] Combination Lap and ShoulderBelts

*[SR03900(ALL)06/95] While your vehicle is in motion, the combinationlap and shoulder belt adjusts to your movement.However, if you brake hard, turn hard, or ifyour vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph(8 km/h) or more, the lap/shoulder belt locksand helps reduce your forward movement.

*[SR04000(ALL)05/95] After you get into your vehicle, close the doorand lock it. Then adjust the seat to the positionthat suits you best.

*[SR04100(ALL)05/95] Pull the combination lap/shoulder belt from theretractor so that the shoulder portion of the beltcrosses your shoulder and chest. Be sure the beltis not twisted. If it is, remove the twist. Insertthe belt tongue into the proper buckle until youhear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure thetongue is securely fastened to the buckle bypulling on tongue.

*[SR04200(ALL)06/95]

quarter page art:0010018-B

Fastening the front seat combination lap and shoulder belt

*[SR04300(ALL)07/95] NOTE: Be sure to read and understandImportant Safety Belt Information atthe beginning of this chapter.


13

[SR04500(ALL)06/95]

one third page art:0000685-I

Unfastening the combination lap and shoulder belts —front and rear outboard seating positions

*[SR04700(ALL)07/95] While the belt retracts, guide the tongue to itsoriginal position to prevent it from striking youor the vehicle.

[SR05625(ALL)04/95] Safety Belts for Front Outboard Passengerand Rear Outboard Seating Positions(Except Wagon Rear-Facing Seat)

*[SR05650(ALL)08/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a dual lockingmode retractor on the shoulder belt portion ofthe combination lap/shoulder safety belt for thefront seat outboard passenger and rear outboardpassengers.

*[SR05670(ALL)08/95] Dual locking mode retractors operate in twoways:

*[SR05675(ALL)08/95] Vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode

*[SR05700(ALL)10/95] In this operating mode, the shoulder beltretractor will allow the occupant freedom ofmovement, locking tight only on hard braking,hard cornering or impacts of approximately5 mph (8 km/h) or more. The retractor can alsobe made to lock by pulling the belt out quickly.


14

%*[SR05725(ALL)08/95] Automatic locking mode

*[SR05750(ALL)08/95] In this operating mode, the shoulder beltretractor will be automatically locked and willremain locked when the combinationlap/shoulder safety belt is buckled, and does notallow the occupant freedom of movement. Thismode provides the following:

*[SR05775(ALL)08/95] ❑A tight lap/shoulder belt on the occupant.

*[SR05800(ALL)08/95] ❑Child safety seat installation.


Rear-facing infant seats should never beplaced in the front seats.

*[SR05825(ALL)09/95] This mode must be used when installing a childsafety seat on the front passenger seat and rearoutboard seats where dual locking retractors areprovided.

*[SR05830(ALL)08/95] To switch the retractor from the emergencylocking mode to the automatic locking mode,perform the following steps:

*[SR05875(ALL)08/95] 1. Buckle the lap/shoulder combination belt.

*[SR05900(ALL)09/95] 2. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt andpull downward until all of the belt isextracted and, when allowed to retract, aclicking sound is heard. At this time, the beltretractor is in the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode).

*[SR05925(ALL)08/95] 3. A clicking sound will continue to be heardas the belt is allowed to retract. Thisindicates that the retractor is in theautomatic locking mode.


15

*[SR05930(ALL)08/95] NOTE: When the combination lap/shoulderbelt is unbuckled and allowed toretract completely, the retractor willswitch to the vehicle sensitive(emergency) locking mode. See thedetailed instructions under Safety Seatsfor Children in this chapter.

%*[SR05940(ALL)08/95] Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment

*[SR05950(ALL)08/95] Driver and right front passenger

*[SR05960(ALL)06/95] You can adjust the shoulder belt height to one offive (5) positions.

[SR05962(ALL)06/95] To adjust the belt down, pinch the releasebutton. To adjust the belt up, slide the adjusterup. (You do not have to pinch the releasebutton.)

*[SR05964(ALL)06/95] Make sure the adjuster is firmly in one of thefive positions. The belt should be adjusted up ordown until the belt rests on your shoulder nearyour neck.

[SR05966(ALL)06/95]

one third page art:0001402-B

The shoulder belt height adjuster


16


Position the shoulder belt height adjusterso that the belt rests across the middle ofyour shoulder. Be sure the shoulder belt isproperly positioned on your shoulder eachtime you use the belt. If the shoulder beltis off your shoulder, on your upper armor neck, there is a greater risk of severeinjury in a collision.

[SR06000(ALL)04/95] Safety Belts for Rear-Facing Occupants(Wagon)

[SR06050(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Never use child safety seats in the thirdseat of a wagon.

[SR06060(ALL)10/95] Your vehicle is equipped with safety seat beltscontaining an adjust tongue at the rear-facingseating positions.

[SR06075(ALL)10/95] When the adjust tongue of the lap/shouldercombination seat belt is latched into the buckle,the tongue will allow the lap portion to becomeshorter, but locks the webbing in place to restrictit from becoming longer.

[SR06125(ALL)10/95] Before you can reach and latch a combinationlap and shoulder belt having an adjust tongueinto the buckle, you may have to lengthen thelap belt portion of it. To lengthen the lap belt,pull some webbing out of the shoulder beltretractor. While holding the webbing below thetongue, grasp the tongue so that it is parallel tothe webbing and slide the tongue upward.Provide enough lap belt length so that thetongue can reach the buckle.


17

[SR06175(ALL)10/95] To fasten the belt, pull the combination lap andshoulder belt from the retractor so that theshoulder belt portion of the safety belt crossesyour shoulder and chest. Be sure the belt is nottwisted. If the belt is twisted remove the twist.Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle foryour seating position until you hear a snap andfeel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securelyfastened to the buckle by pulling on the tongue.


The lap belts should fit snugly and as lowas possible around the hips, not aroundthe waist.


All front and rear seat outboardoccupants (including pregnant women)should wear lap and shoulder belts, foroptimum protection in a collision.


Failure to follow these precautions couldincrease the risk and/or severity of injuryin a collision. 1) Use the shoulder belt onthe outside shoulder only. Never wear theshoulder belt under the arm. 2) Neverswing it around your neck over the insideshoulder. 3) Never use a single belt formore than one person.

*[SR06275(ALL)03/95] Due to folding rear seats, sometimes the bucklesand tongues toward the center of the vehiclemay be hidden by the rear edge of the seatcushion. Pull them out so they will be accessible.


18

[SR06301(ALL)10/95] While you are fastened in the seat belt, theshoulder belt adjusts to your movement.However, if you brake hard, turn hard, or ifyour vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph(8 km/h) or more, the safety belt will becomelocked and help reduce your forward movement.

[SR06500(ALL)03/95] To unfasten the belt, push the red release buttonon the end of the buckle. This allows the tongueto unlatch from the buckle. While the beltretracts, guide the tongue to its original positionto prevent it from striking you or the vehicle.

[SR06550(ALL)02/95]

one third page art:0000029-F

Unfastening the combination lap and shoulder belts for therear-facing third seat (wagon)


19

[SR06560(ALL)04/95] Center Occupant Rear Safety Belt (Sedan)

[SR06565(ALL)04/95] The safety belt in the center rear seating positionhas a detachable shoulder belt.

[SR06570(ALL)04/95] To attach the shoulder belt to the lap belt, pullthe shoulder belt out from the retractor in theseatback and insert the lap belt connecting pininto the wide end of the key-slot on theshoulder belt as shown in Figure 1. Pull theconnecting pin into the narrow end of thekey-slot until you hear a snap and feel it latch.See Figure 2. Make sure the shoulder belt issecurely fastened to the lap belt by pulling upon the shoulder belt.

[SR06575(ALL)04/95]

half page art:0001371-B

The reverse side of the lap belt and the detachableshoulder belt


20

[SR06580(ALL)05/95]

half page art:0001372-A

The reverse side of the shoulder belt attached to the lapbelt


The rear center lap belt must be tightenedseparately from the shoulder strap. Thelap belt must fit snugly, and as low aspossible around the hips. Do not weararound your waist. For information aboutadjusting the belt, see “LAP BELTS” inthis chapter.

[SR06590(ALL)04/95] Detach the shoulder belt before folding downthe passenger side rear seat. To detach theshoulder belt, slide the connecting pin to thewide end of the key-slot and lift the shoulderbelt off the connecting pin. As the shoulder beltretracts, guide the belt so that it does not strikeyou or the vehicle.


21

%*[SR06601(ALL)05/95] Lap Belts[SR06650(ALL)10/95] The lap belts in the center front seating position

(if equipped) and center rear seat do not adjustautomatically. You must adjust them to fitsnugly and as low as possible around your hips.Do not wear the lap belt around your waist.

[SR06675(ALL)04/95] The front center seat belt buckle and tongue arestowed in a pocket between the seat cushion andseatback. Remove them from the stowage pocketbefore fastening.

*[SR06700(ALL)06/95] Pull the belt across your hips and insert thetongue into the correct buckle on your seatuntil you hear a snap and feel it lock. Make surethe buckle is securely fastened.

%*[SR06750(ALL)06/95] If you need to lengthen the belt, unfasten it andtip the belt tongue at a right angle to the belt.Pull the belt tongue over your lap until itreaches the buckle.

*[SR06800(ALL)06/95] If you need to shorten the belt, pull on the looseend of the webbing until the belt fits snugly.

[SR06850(ALL)08/95]


Unfastening the lap belts for the center front and centerrear seating positions


22

*[SR06900(ALL)08/95] To unfasten the belt, push the release button onthe end of the buckle. This allows the tongue tounlatch from the buckle.


The lap belts should fit snugly and as lowas possible around the hips, not aroundthe waist.

%*[SR07750(ALL)08/95] Safety Belt Extension Assembly

*[SR07800(ALL)07/95] For some people, the safety belt may be tooshort even when it is fully extended. You canadd about eight inches (20 cm) to the belt lengthwith a safety belt extension assembly (partnumber 611C22). Safety belt extensions areavailable at no cost from your dealer.

[SR07850(ALL)02/95] This assembly is not for use in the wagonrear-facing seat.


The use of the safety belt extension in thewagon rear-facing seat will increase therisk of personal injury.

*[SR07924(ALL)08/95] Use only extensions manufactured by the samesupplier as the safety belt. Manufactureridentification is located at the end of thewebbing on the label. Also, use the safety beltextension only if the safety belt is too short foryou when fully extended. Do not use extensionto change the fit of the shoulder belt across thetorso.


Failure to follow these instructions willaffect the performance of the safety beltsand increase the risk of personal injury.


23

%*[SR07950(ALL)08/95] Safety Belt Maintenance

*[SR07970(ALL)09/95] Check the safety belt systems periodically tomake sure that they work properly and are notdamaged.

%*[SR07980(ALL)10/95] All safety belt assemblies, including retractors,buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies(slide bar) (if equipped), child safety seat tetherbracket assemblies (if equipped), and attachinghardware, should be inspected after anycollision. Ford recommends that all safety beltassemblies used in vehicles involved in acollision be replaced. However, if the collisionwas minor and a qualified technician finds thatthe belts do not show damage and continue tooperate properly, they do not need to bereplaced. Safety belt assemblies not in useduring a collision should also be inspected andreplaced if either damage or improper operationis noted.

%*[SR08400(ALL)06/95] Cleaning the Safety Belts

*[SR08500(ALL)06/95] Clean the safety belts with any mild soapsolution that is recommended for cleaningupholstery or carpets. Do not bleach or dye thebelt webbing because this may weaken it.

%*[SR14300(ALL)06/95] Air Bag Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS)

*[SR14650(ALL)05/95] The driver and right front passenger air bags areSupplemental Restraint Systems (SRS), providedat these seating positions in addition to thelap/shoulder belt, and are designed tosupplement the protection provided to properlybelted occupants in moderate to severe frontalcollisions. The supplemental air bag system doesnot provide restraint to the lower body.


24

%*[SR14800(ALL)05/95] The Importance of Wearing Safety Belts


Safety belts must be worn by all vehicleoccupants to be properly restrained andhelp reduce the risk of injury in acollision.


All occupants of the vehicle, including thedriver, should always wear their safetybelts, even when an air bag SupplementalRestraint System is provided.

*[SR15000(ALL)01/95] There are four very important reasons to usesafety belts even with an air bag system. Useyour safety belts to:

*[SR15100(ALL)01/95] ❑help keep you in the proper position (awayfrom the air bag) when it inflates

*[SR15200(ALL)01/95] ❑ reduce the risk of harm in rollover, side orrear impact collisions, because an air bag isnot designed to inflate in such situations

*[SR15300(ALL)01/95] ❑ reduce the risk of harm in frontal collisionsthat are not severe enough to activate thesupplemental air bag

*[SR15400(ALL)01/95] ❑ reduce the risk of being thrown from yourvehicle

%*[SR15500(ALL)01/95] The Importance of Being Properly Seated

*[SR15600(ALL)05/95] In a collision, the air bag must inflate extremelyfast to help provide additional protection foryou. In order to do this, the air bag must inflatewith considerable force. If you are not seated ina normal riding position with your back againstthe seatback, the air bag may not protect youproperly and could possibly hurt you as itinflates.


25


If a passenger is not properly seated andrestrained, an inflating air bag could causeserious injury.

*[SR16050(ALL)07/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a right frontpassenger air bag. Air bags deploy with greatforce, faster than the blink of an eye. Frontpassengers, especially children and small adults,must never sit on the front edge of the seat,stand near the glove compartment of theinstrument panel, or lean over near the air bagcover when the vehicle is moving. All occupantsshould sit with their backs against the seatback,move the seat to the most rearward position ifpossible and use the safety belts. Childrenweighing less than 40 lbs. (18 kg) always shoulduse child or infant seats.


Rear-facing infant seats should never beplaced in the front seat.

*[SR16200(ALL)07/95] In rear-facing infant seats, the infant’s head iscloser to the air bag. The force of the rapidlyinflating air bag could push the top of therear-facing seat against the vehicle seatback orcenter armrests (if so equipped), or centerconsole (if so equipped). REAR-FACINGINFANT CARRIERS MUST ALWAYS BESECURED IN THE REAR SEAT, and other childsafety seats and infant seats should be secured inthe rear seat whenever possible.


26


When using forward-facing child seatsmove the passenger seat as far back fromthe instrument panel as possible. NEVERSECURE REAR-FACING INFANT SEATSIN THE FRONT SEAT.

*[SR16255(ALL)11/95] The force of the rapidly inflating passenger airbag could push the top of the rear-facing seatagainst the vehicle seatback, armrests or console.Rear-facing infant seats must always be securedin the rear seat.


Do not place objects or mount equipmenton or near the air bag cover on thesteering wheel or in front seat areas thatmay come in contact with a deploying airbag. Failure to follow this instruction mayincrease the risk of personal injury in theevent of a collision.

*[SR16350(ALL)07/95] For further information about the propermounting of equipment in the front seat of thisvehicle, please refer to Ford’s brochure entitledSome Important Information About Air BagSupplemental Restraint System which can beobtained by calling Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356.Ask for brochure FPS-8602.

*[SR16400(ALL)08/95] For additional important safety information onthe proper use of seat belts, child seats, andinfant seats, please read the other sections of thischapter of the Owner Guide, especially sectionsentitled Safety Belts for Children and Safety Seatsfor Children.


27

%*[SR16500(ALL)01/95] How the Air Bag Supplemental RestraintSystem Operates

*[SR16600(ALL)06/95] The Air Bag Supplemental Restraint Systemconsists of the driver and passenger air bags,impact sensors, a system diagnostic module, areadiness light and tone, and the electricalwiring which connects the components.

*[SR16750(ALL)06/95] The driver air bag is in the center of the steeringwheel. The front passenger seat air bag islocated in the center of the instrument panelledge above the glove compartment. Both airbags are designed to stay out of sight until theyare activated.

[SR16775(ALL)11/94]


The location of air bags and warning labels


28

*[SR17400(ALL)07/95] If a collision occurs, the sensors sense theseverity of the impact and activate the air bags ifnecessary. The air bag system is designed todeploy in frontal and front-angled collisionsmore severe than hitting a parked vehicle (ofsimilar size and weight) head-on at about28 mph (45 km/h). Because the system sensesthe crash severity rather than vehicle speed,some frontal collisions at speeds above 28 mph(45 km/h) will not inflate the air bag.

[SR17500(ALL)12/95] When the sensors activate the system, the airbags inflate rapidly, filling with non-toxic gasmixture in a fraction of a second. Immediatelyafter inflation, the air bags deflate by releasingthe gas mixture through vent holes. The wholeprocess takes place in a matter of seconds.


Air bag system components get hot afterinflation. Do not touch them afterinflation.


29

*[SR17710(ALL)08/95]


Inflated driver-side air bag

[SR17730(ALL)09/95]


Inflated passenger-side air bag


30


If the air bag is inflated, THE AIR BAGWILL NOT FUNCTION AGAIN ANDMUST BE REPLACED IMMEDIATELY. Ifthe air bag is not replaced, the unrepairedarea will increase the risk of injury in acollision.

*[SR18425(ALL)07/95] To ensure that the air bag system will operate asintended in a crash, the system is equipped witha diagnostic module, which controls a readinesslamp and a warning tone. The diagnosticmodule monitors its own circuits, the air bagelectrical system, the air bag readiness light, theair bag power, and the air bag inflators.

%*[SR18450(ALL)05/95] The air bag system uses a readiness light on theinstrument cluster and a tone to indicate thecondition of the system. When you turn theignition key to the ON position, this light willilluminate for approximately six (6) seconds andthen turn off. This indicates that the system isoperating normally. NOTE: Maintenance of theair bag system is not required.

%*[SR18475(ALL)06/95] A problem with the system is indicated by oneor more of the following:

*[SR18501(ALL)06/95] ❑ the readiness light will either flash or stay lit,

*[SR18525(ALL)06/95] ❑or it will not light immediately after ignitionis turned on,

*[SR18550(ALL)06/95] ❑or a group of five beeps will be heard. Thetone pattern will repeat periodically until theproblem and light are repaired.

*[SR18575(ALL)08/95] If any of these things happen, have the air bagsystem serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercurydealer immediately. Unless serviced, the air bagSupplemental Restraint System may not functionproperly in the event of a collision.


31


Do not attempt to service, repair, ormodify the Air Bag SupplementalRestraint System or its fuses. See yourFord or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.

%*[SR19000(ALL)05/95] Disposal of air bags or air bag equippedvehicles

*[SR19500(ALL)06/95] For disposal of air bags or air bag equippedvehicles, see your local Ford or Lincoln-Mercurydealer. Air bags MUST be disposed of byqualified personnel.

%*[SR20200(ALL)05/95] Safety Restraints for Children

*[SR20300(ALL)02/95] In the U.S. and Canada, you are required by lawto use safety restraints for children. If smallchildren ride in your vehicle — this generallyincludes children who are four years old oryounger and who weigh 40 pounds (18 kg) orless — you must put them in safety seats thatare made specially for children. Safety beltsalone do not provide maximum protection forthese children. Check your local and state lawsfor specific requirements.


Never let a passenger hold a child on hisor her lap while the vehicle is moving.The passenger cannot protect the childfrom injury in a collision.


To prevent the risk of injury, make surechildren sit where they can be properlyrestrained.


32


Passengers should not be allowed to ridein the cargo area. Persons not riding in aseat with a fastened seat belt are muchmore likely to suffer serious injury in acollision. Cargo should always be securedto prevent it from shifting and causingdamage to the vehicle or harm topassengers.

*[SR20650(ALL)06/95] When possible, put children in the rear seat ofyour vehicle. Accident statistics suggest thatchildren are safer when properly restrained inthe rear seating positions than in the frontseating positions.


Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’sinstructions included with the safety seatyou put in your vehicle. If you do notinstall and use the safety seat properly,the child may be injured in a sudden stopor collision.


Safety belts and seats can become hot in avehicle that has been closed up in sunnyweather; they could burn a small child.Check seat covers and buckles before youplace a child anywhere near them.


Never leave a child unattended in yourvehicle.


33

%*[SR22000(ALL)01/95] Safety Seats for Children

*[SR22100(ALL)05/95] Use a safety seat that is recommended for thesize and weight of the child. Always follow thesafety seat manufacturer’s instructions wheninstalling and using the safety seat.

*[SR22125(ALL)08/95] Ford recommends the use of a child safety seathaving a top tether strap. Install the child safetyseat in a seating position which is capable ofproviding a tether anchorage. For moreinformation on top tether straps see AttachingSafety Seats With Tether Straps in this chapter.

*[SR22150(ALL)08/95] When installing a child safety seat, be sure touse the correct safety belt buckle for that seatingposition, and make sure the tongue is securelyfastened in the buckle. For a shoulder/lap beltcombination with a sliding tongue, make surethe retractor is in the automatic locking mode.

*[SR22375(ALL)07/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a right frontpassenger air bag. Air bags deploy with greatforce, faster than the blink of an eye. Frontpassengers, especially children and small adults,must never sit on the front edge of the seat,stand near the glove compartment of theinstrument panel, or lean over near the air bagcover when the vehicle is moving. All occupantsshould sit with their backs against the seatback,move the seat to the most rearward position ifpossible and use the safety belts. Childrenweighing less than 40 lbs. (18 kg) always shoulduse child or infant seats.


When using forward-facing child seatsmove the passenger seat as far back fromthe instrument panel as possible. NEVERSECURE REAR-FACING INFANT SEATSIN THE FRONT SEAT.


34

*[SR22420(ALL)11/95] The force of the rapidly inflating passenger airbag could push the top of the rear-facing seatagainst the vehicle seatback, armrests or console.Rear-facing infant seats must always be securedin the rear seat.

*[SR22450(ALL)07/95] All child restraint systems are designed to besecured in vehicle seats by lap belts or by thelap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.


If you do not properly secure the safetyseat, the child occupying the seat may beinjured during a collision or sudden stop.An unsecured safety seat could also injureother passengers.




Never use child safety seats in the thirdseat of a wagon.


Always keep the buckle release buttonpointing upward and away from the childseat, with the tongue between the childseat and the release button as shown inthe following illustration.


35

[SR22740(ALL)11/94]


Safety belt buckle placement for child seats

%*[SR22750(ALL)11/94] Installing Child Safety Seats in the FrontPassenger Seat and Outer Rear SeatingPositions

*[SR22800(ALL)06/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a dual lockingmode retractor on the shoulder belt portion ofthe combination lap/shoulder safety belt for thefront passenger seat and rear outer seats. Theautomatic locking mode must be used wheninstalling a child seat or infant carrier in thefront passenger seat or rear outer seats.


Never install a rear-facing child seat orinfant carrier in the right front passengerseat.


36

*[SR22901(ALL)03/95] If you choose to install a child safety seat in thefront seating position, move vehicle seat as farback as possible.

*[SR22950(ALL)12/94] 1. Position the child seat on the passenger seatof the vehicle.

*[SR23001(ALL)09/95] 2. Pull down on shoulder belt, then graspshoulder belt and lap belt together. SeeFigure 1.

*[SR23050(ALL)09/95]


Pulling out belt webbing


37

*[SR23100(ALL)08/95] 3. While holding the shoulder and lap beltportions together, route the tongue throughthe child seat according to the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions. See Figure 2. Besure that the belt webbing is not twisted.

*[SR23150(ALL)06/95]


Routing the lap/shoulder belt


38

*[SR23200(ALL)06/95]


Buckling the belt


39

*[SR23250(ALL)08/95] 4. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt andpull downward until all of the belt isextracted and a click is heard. At this time,the retractor is in the automatic lockingmode (child seat restraint mode).See Figure 4.

*[SR23301(ALL)06/95]


Setting the retractor to automatic locking mode

*[SR23350(ALL)07/95] 5. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder webbing. A clicking sound will beheard as the belt retracts. This indicates theretractor is in the automatic locking mode.Push down on the child seat while you pullup on the belt to remove any slack in thebelt. Figures 5 and 6.


40

*[SR23401(ALL)09/95]


Allowing shoulder belt to retract

*[SR23450(ALL)09/95]


Removing slack from belt


41

*[SR23501(ALL)07/95] 6. Before placing the child in the child seat,forcibly tilt the seat from side to side, andtug it forward to make sure that the seat issecurely held in place, Figure 7.

*[SR23550(ALL)06/95]


Checking that the seat is secure


42

*[SR23601(ALL)11/94] 7. Double check that the retractor is in theautomatic locking mode. Try to pull morebelt out of the retractor. If you cannot, thebelt is in the automatic locking mode,Figure 8.

*[SR23650(ALL)06/95]


Checking the retractor

*[SR23701(ALL)05/95] 8. Check to make sure that the child seat isproperly secured prior to each use. If theretractor is not locked, repeat steps 4through 7.

*[SR23750(ALL)05/95] NOTE: To remove the retractor from automaticlock mode, allow seat belt to retractfully to its stowed position and theretractor will automatically switch backto the vehicle sensitive locking modefor normal adult usage.


43



%*[SR24800(ALL)06/95] Attaching Safety Seats With Tether Straps

*[SR24950(ALL)06/95] Some manufacturers make safety seats thatinclude a tether strap that goes over the back ofthe vehicle seat and attaches to an anchoringpoint. Other manufacturers offer the tether strapas an accessory. Contact the manufacturer ofyour child safety seat for information aboutordering a tether strap.

*[SR25050(ALL)08/95] Front Seats

*[SR25150(ALL)08/95] To install a tether from a child safety seat in thefront seat:

*[SR25250(ALL)08/95] 1. Buckle the lap/shoulder belt (in the seatdirectly behind the front passenger seat inwhich the child safety seat will be installed).

*[SR25350(ALL)07/95] 2. Pull all the stored belt out of the rear seatretractor to switch the retractor to automaticlocking mode.

*[SR25375(ALL)08/95] 3. Let the retractor wind up the slack from thelap/shoulder belt.

*[SR25425(ALL)08/95] 4. Install the child safety seat in the front seat.Refer to the previous section on InstallingSafety Seats. Hook the tether strap hookaround the webbing near the center of theshoulder portion of the locked lap/shoulderbelt.

*[SR25525(ALL)08/95] 5. Tighten the tether strap.


44

*[SR25550(ALL)07/95] Rear Seats

*[SR25600(ALL)07/95] If you use a tethered safety seat on one of therear seats, you can anchor the strap to theappropriate tether anchor directly behind thatseat position.

*[SR25725(ALL)06/95] Tether anchorage hardware

[SR25800(ALL)06/95] Attachment holes (at each rear outboard seatingposition) have been provided in your vehicle toattach anchor hardware, if required. Kits can beobtained at no charge from any Ford orLincoln-Mercury dealer.

*[SR26100(ALL)06/95] Be sure to follow the child safety seatmanufacturer’s instructions.


Tighten the anchor according tospecifications. Otherwise, the safety seatmay not be properly secured and the childmay be injured in a sudden stop orcollision.

[SR26600(ALL)04/95] In a station wagon, you simply attach the tetherstrap to one of the anchors that are alreadyinstalled for you.

*[SR26615(ALL)06/95] Tether anchorage hardware

[SR26630(ALL)04/95] All wagons have a tether anchor installed foreach of the second row seating positions.


45

[SR26700(ALL)04/95]

two third page art:0000041-C

Finding the tether anchors in the wagon

[SR26750(ALL)04/95] 1. Behind the second seat, find the plasticsnap-on covers for the floor anchors.

*[SR26801(ALL)04/95] 2. Use a screwdriver or coin to snap the coversoff the anchor in a rearward and upwarddirection. Remove the covers completely.

[SR26850(ALL)04/95] 3. Snap the tether strap hook onto theU-shaped tether anchor.


46

[SR26900(ALL)04/95] Built-In Child Seat (Wagon — If equipped)

[SR26950(ALL)04/95] The second row seat may include an optionalbuilt-in child safety seat on the passenger side.The child restraint is to be used only by childrenwho are at least one year old, weigh between 9and 27 kilograms (20 and 60 pounds) and whoseshoulders (top) are below the shoulder harnessslots in the seatback.

*[SR27000(ALL)08/95] If your child is less than one year old or weighsless than 9 kilograms (20 pounds), always use arear facing infant or convertible seat because achild of that size is not sufficiently developed towithstand crash forces in a front facing position.Follow the specific manufacturer’s instructionsfor weight and height restrictions.

*[SR27051(ALL)08/95] Children must be properly buckled before ridingin the vehicle. It is the law in every state andprovince. This child seat conforms to allFederal/Canadian motor vehicle safetystandards.

*[SR27100(ALL)08/95] Built-in child seat belt retractors

*[SR27150(ALL)08/95] The belts on the built-in child seat are equippedwith a retractor that locks when both belttongues are latched into the crotch safety beltbuckle.

[SR27251(ALL)12/95] The retractor will automatically snug the beltsaround the child. Frequently check the childseat’s lap and shoulder harness belts for correctplacement and tightness. Use the child seat onlyif the harness belts will stay snug with a childbuckled in the seat. If belts do not remain snug,take the vehicle to the dealer for child seatrepair.


47


Always adjust the lap and shoulderharness belts provided with this child seatsnugly around your child.


Never leave a child unattended in yourvehicle.


Safety belts and seats can become hot in avehicle that has been closed up in sunnyweather; they could burn a small child.Check seat covers and buckles before youplace a child anywhere near them.


Failure to follow all of the instructions onthe use of this child restraint system canresult in your child striking the vehicle’sinterior during a sudden stop or crash.

*[SR27500(ALL)08/95] How to use the Built-In Child Seat

*[SR27551(ALL)05/95] Read the following procedures and all of thelabels on the Built-In Child Seat before using theseat.


Never use the Built-In Child Seat as abooster cushion with the adult safetybelts. A child using the adult belts couldslide forward and out from under thesafety belts.


48

[SR27605(ALL)12/95] 1. Pull and release flap from top of seatback.See Figure 1.

[SR27620(ALL)12/95] NOTE: The child seat cannot be opened unlessthe seatback is latched in the uprightposition.

[SR27630(ALL)12/95]

one third page art:0001500-A

Figure 1: Releasing the flap

[SR27651(ALL)12/95] 2. Grasp the child seat at the top of theseatback and pull the top forward to releasethe latch. See Figure 2.

[SR27770(ALL)12/95]


Figure 2: Releasing the latch


49

[SR27780(ALL)12/95] 3. Continue to unfold the child seat until itrests on the seat as shown in Figure 3.

[SR27801(ALL)12/95]


Figure 3: Opening the built-in child seat

[SR27850(ALL)12/95] 4. Read the information and warnings on thechild seat cushion and shoulder safety belt.Refer to Figure 4. Check the child’s size,weight and age to be sure the child is nottoo small or too large for the child seat.

[SR27900(ALL)12/95]


Figure 4: Child seat information and warnings


50

[SR28000(ALL)12/95] 5. If connected, squeeze the top and the bottomof the right half of the chest clip and pull toseparate both halves.

[SR28100(ALL)12/95] 6. Place the child on the child seat and positionthe shoulder belts over each shoulder. Referto Figure 5.

[SR28125(ALL)12/95]


Figure 5: Shoulder safety belt placement on the child

[SR28150(ALL)12/95] NOTE: Read the following steps carefully tobecome familiar with the indicatorwindows located on each safety belttongue and the chest clip. When eitherof the tongues or the chest clip isunbuckled, the color red appears in thewindow. When the tongues or chestclip are securely buckled, the colorgreen appears.


51

[SR28200(ALL)12/95] 7. Insert either the left or right safety belttongue into the single opening of the crotchsafety belt buckle as shown in Figure 6. (Itdoes not matter which tongue is insertedfirst.) Then insert the other tongue. Allowbelts to retract and fit snugly.

[SR28220(ALL)12/95] NOTE: The indicator window on each tonguemust appear green when buckled.

[SR28240(ALL)12/95] NOTE: If a belt locks during extraction, allowbelts to retract FULLY and repeatprocedure.


If both tongues do not latch in the buckle,do not use the child seat. See your dealerfor repairs.


52

[SR28300(ALL)12/95]

three fourths page art:0

Figure 6: Fastening the crotch safety belt buckle


53

[SR28450(ALL)12/95] 8. Fasten both halves of the chest clip belowthe child’s shoulders and adjust it tocomfortably hold the shoulder belts in placeon the child’s chest. The color green mustappear in the indicator window whenfastened. (The purpose of this clip is toposition the shoulder belts correctly on thechild’s shoulders. The clip can be easilypulled apart and is designed to pull apartduring a collision. The clip helps keep thebelts on the shoulders of a sleeping orsquirming child.) Refer to Figure 7.


54

[SR28500(ALL)12/95]

three fourths page art:0

Figure 7: Securing the chest clip


55

[SR28550(ALL)12/95] 9. Pull the shoulder belts out to ensure that thecrotch safety belt buckle is securely fastenedand the retractor is locked. Refer to Figure 8.

[SR28575(ALL)12/95]


Figure 8: Checking for securely latched buckle and lockedretractor

[SR28600(ALL)12/95] 10. If the belts become too tight, unbuckle thecrotch safety belt buckle, allow belts toretract, then reinsert both belt tongues.

*[SR28650(ALL)08/95] To remove the child from the built-in childseat:

[SR28700(ALL)12/95] 1. Squeeze the tabs on the top and bottom ofthe chest clip and pull the halves apart toopen the chest clip. Refer back to Figure 7.

*[SR28750(ALL)08/95] 2. Press the release button on the crotch safetybelt buckle.

[SR28800(ALL)12/95] 3. Slide the shoulder belts off the child’sshoulders and remove the child. Refer backto Figure 5.


56

*[SR28850(ALL)08/95] To stow the built-in child seat:

[SR28900(ALL)08/95] 1. Return the child seat cushion to the uprightposition.

[SR28950(ALL)08/95] 2. Press firmly in the center and top of thechild seat to place it in the stowed position.

[SR28960(ALL)12/95] 3. Reattach the flap on the child seat to the topof the seatback.

[SR29000(ALL)03/95] The seat can now be used by an adult or theseatback can be folded down.

[SR29025(ALL)09/95] NOTE: The seatback cannot be folded downunless the child seat is fully stowed.

*[SR29050(ALL)08/95] Inspection after a collision


All built-in child restraints, includingseats, buckles, retractors, seat latches,interlocks, and attaching hardware shouldbe inspected by a qualified Dealertechnician after any collision. If the childseat was in use during a collision, Fordrecommends replacing it. However, if thecollision was minor and a qualifiedtechnician finds that the child restraintsdo not show damage and continue tooperate properly, they do not need to bereplaced. Built-in child seats not in useduring a collision should also beinspected and replaced if either damage orimproper operation is noted.


57

*[SR29150(ALL)08/95] Built-in child seat maintenance

*[SR29200(ALL)08/95] Regularly inspect the lap and shoulder beltssystem of your child seat. See your Ford dealerif the shoulder belt webbing is frayed, or if thebuckle and tongue are damaged and/or do notfunction properly.

%*[SR29250(ALL)08/95] Cleaning

[SR29300(ALL)08/95] Your built-in child seat may be cleaned withmild soap and water. Do not use householdcleaners as they may weaken the webbing ordamage the plastic parts. For your convenience,the liner is removable and can bemachine-washed and air-dried.

%*[SR29500(ALL)07/95] Safety Belts for Children

*[SR29600(ALL)07/95] Children who are too large for child safety seatsshould always wear safety belts. (See instructionswith your child seat, or contact its manufacturer,to determine maximum size of child that willsafely fit in the seat.)


If safety belts are not properly worn andadjusted as described, the risk of seriousinjury to the child in a collision will bemuch greater.

*[SR29800(ALL)12/95] If the shoulder belt portion of one of the lap andshoulder belts can be positioned so that it doesnot cross or rest in front of the child’s face orneck, the child should wear the lap and shoulderbelt. Moving the child closer to the center of thevehicle may help provide a good shoulder beltfit.


58

*[SR29900(ALL)07/95] To improve the fit of lap and shoulder belts onchildren who have outgrown child safety seats,Ford recommends use of a belt-positioningbooster seat that is labelled as conforming to allFederal motor vehicle safety standards.Belt-positioning booster seats raise the child andprovide a shorter, firmer seating cushion thatencourages safer seating posture and better fit oflap and shoulder belts on the child. Abelt-positioning booster should be used if theshoulder belt rests in front of the child’s face orneck, or if the lap belt does not fit snugly onboth thighs, or if the thighs are too short to letthe child sit all the way back on the seat cushionwhen the lower legs hang over the edge of theseat cushion. You may wish to discuss thespecific needs of your child with yourpediatrician.


Do not use a belt-positioning booster witha lap-only belt.

*[SR30100(ALL)07/95] Lap belts and the lap belt portion of lap andshoulder belts should always be worn snuglyand below the hips, touching the child’s thighs.


To reduce the risk of serious injury in acollision, children should always ride withthe seatback upright.


59

Starting Your Taurus

*[ST03300(ALL)03/95] Ignition%*[ST03400(ALL)01/95] Understanding the Positions of the Ignition

[ST03725(ALL)11/94]

quarter page art:0000017-D

The positions of the key in the ignition

%*[ST04050(ALL)07/95] ACCESSORY allows some of your vehicle’selectrical accessories such as the radio and thewindshield wipers to operate while the engine isnot running.

% [ST04100(ALL)10/89] LOCK locks the steering wheel. It also locks thegearshift for all vehicles with an automatictransaxle.

*[ST04175(ALL)08/95] The automatic transaxle gearshift must be in P(Park) to move the key to the LOCK position.

*[ST04200(ALL)01/95] LOCK is the only position that allows you toremove the key. The LOCK feature helps toprotect your vehicle from theft.

%*[ST04300(ALL)05/95] If the key is stuck in the LOCK position, movethe steering wheel left or right until the keyturns freely.

[ST04325(ALL)04/95] OFF allows you to shut off the engine and allaccessories without locking the steering wheel orthe automatic transaxle gearshift lever.

File:04fcstt.exUpdate:Mon Jan 22 15:46:50 1996

60

*[ST04350(ALL)05/95] ON allows you to test your vehicle’s warninglights (except the brake system warning light) tomake sure they work before you start theengine. The key returns to the ON position oncethe engine is started and remains in this positionwhile the engine runs.

*[ST04375(ALL)03/95] START cranks the engine. Release the key oncethe engine starts so that you do not damage thestarter. The key should return to ON when yourelease it. The START position also allows youto test the brake warning light.

%*[ST04500(ALL)02/95] Removing the Key From the Ignition

[ST06000(ALL)02/95] Procedures for removing the key from theignition will be the same for both the column-and console-mounted gearshifts.

*[ST06300(ALL)06/95] 1. Put the gearshift in P (Park).

*[ST06400(ALL)01/95] 2. Set the parking brake fully.

[ST06500(ALL)11/94] 3. Turn the ignition to the LOCK position.

*[ST06600(ALL)03/95] 4. Remove the key.

[ST07310(ALL)05/95] If you have difficulty in turning the key, rotatethe steering wheel slightly because it may bebinding.

%*[ST07520(ALL)05/95] If the driver’s door is open while the key is stillin the ignition, a warning chime sounds.

*[ST07525(ALL)06/95] RWARNING

Always set the parking brake fully andmake sure the gearshift is securely latchedin P (Park).


61


Do not leave children, unreliable adults,or pets alone in your vehicle. They couldaccidentally injure themselves or othersthrough inadvertent operation of thevehicle. Further, on hot, sunny days,temperatures in a closed vehicle couldquickly become high enough to causesevere and possibly fatal injuries topeople as well as animals.

*[ST08200(ALL)03/95] Starting Your Vehicle%*[ST08300(ALL)05/94] Preparing to Start Your Vehicle


Do not start your vehicle in a closedgarage or other enclosed area. Never sit ina stopped vehicle for more than a shortperiod of time with the engine running.Exhaust fumes are toxic. See GuardingAgainst Exhaust Fumes in this chapter formore instructions.

*[ST08400(ALL)01/95] Before you start your vehicle, do the following:

*[ST08500(ALL)08/95] 1. Make sure all occupants in the vehiclebuckle their safety belts. See Safety Restraintsin the Index for more details.

*[ST08600(ALL)03/95] 2. Make sure your headlamps and otheraccessories are turned off and the parkingbrake is set.

[ST08850(ALL)11/94] 3. Make sure that the gearshift is in P (Park)before you turn the key.

*[ST09150(ALL)03/95] Before you start your vehicle, you should testthe warning lights on the instrument panel tomake sure that they work. Refer to the WarningLights and Gauges chapter.


62

%*[ST09310(ALL)02/95] Starting Your Engine

*[ST09320(ALL)06/95] To start your engine:

*[ST09330(ALL)05/95] 1. Follow the steps under Preparing to StartYour Vehicle at the beginning of this section.

*[ST09340(ALL)03/95] 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.

*[ST09350(ALL)06/95] 3. DO NOT depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting your engine. DO NOT use theaccelerator while the vehicle is parked.

*[ST09360(ALL)02/95] 4. Turn the key to the START position(cranking) until the engine starts. Allow thekey to return to the ON position after theengine has started.

*[ST09370(ALL)02/95] If you have difficulty in turning the key,rotate the steering wheel slightly because itmay be binding.

%*[ST09375(ALL)04/95] For a cold engine:

*[ST09381(ALL)06/95] ❑At temperatures 10˚F (-12˚C) and below: Ifthe engine does not start in fifteen (15)seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF,wait approximately ten (10) seconds so youdo not flood the engine, then try again.

*[ST09385(ALL)04/95] ❑At temperatures above 10˚F (-12˚C): If theengine does not start in five (5) seconds onthe first try, turn the key to OFF, waitapproximately ten (10) seconds so you do notflood the engine, then try again.

%*[ST09387(ALL)05/95] For a warm engine:

*[ST09390(ALL)04/95] ❑Do not hold the key in the START positionfor more than five (5) seconds at a time. Ifthe engine does not start within five (5)seconds on the first try, turn the key to theOFF position. Wait a few seconds after thestarter stops, then try again.


63

*[ST09400(ALL)08/95] Whenever you start your vehicle, release the keyas soon as the engine starts. Excessive crankingcould damage the starter.

*[ST09410(ALL)05/95] After you start the engine, let it idle for a fewseconds. Keep your foot on the brake pedal andput the gearshift lever in gear. Release theparking brake. Slowly release the brake pedaland drive away in the normal manner.

[ST09420(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with anautomatic transaxle and has aninterlock that prevents you fromshifting out of P (Park) unless yourfoot is on the brake pedal.

%*[ST09480(ALL)04/95] If the engine does not start after two attempts:

*[ST09492(ALL)04/95] 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.

*[ST09494(ALL)04/95] 2. Press the accelerator all the way to the floorand hold it.

*[ST09496(ALL)04/95] 3. Turn the ignition key to the START position.

*[ST09497(ALL)04/95] 4. Release the ignition key when the enginestarts.

*[ST09498(ALL)04/95] 5. Release the accelerator gradually as theengine speeds up. Then drive away in thenormal manner.

*[ST09500(ALL)04/95] If the engine still does not start, the fuel pumpshut-off switch may have been triggered. Fordirections on how to reset the switch see FuelPump Shut-Off Switch later in this chapter.

[ST10200(ALL)12/95] A computer system controls the engine’s idlespeed. When you start your vehicle, the engine’sidle speed normally runs high. These fasterengine speeds will make your vehicle coastslightly faster than its normal idle speed. Itshould, however, slow down after a short time.If it does not, have the idle speed checked byyour dealer or a qualified technician.


64

*[ST10250(ALL)07/95] If the engine idle speed does not slow downautomatically, do not allow your vehicle to idlefor more than 10 minutes. Have the vehiclechecked.


Extended idling at high engine speeds canproduce very high temperatures in theengine and exhaust system, creating therisk of fire or other damage.


Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle indry grass or other dry ground cover. Theemission system heats up the enginecompartment and exhaust system, whichcan start a fire.

*[ST10500(ALL)03/95] If you consistently start your vehicle in subzerotemperatures, use an engine block heater (ifyour vehicle has this option).

%*[ST10600(ALL)06/95] Engine Block Heater (If equipped)

*[ST10700(ALL)03/95] Engine block heaters are strongly recommendedif you live in a region where temperatures reach-10˚F (-23˚C) or below. An engine block heaterwarms the engine coolant, which improvesstarting, warms up the engine faster, and allowsthe heater-defrost system to respond quickly.

*[ST10900(ALL)02/95] To turn the heater on, simply plug it into agrounded 110-volt outlet. Ford recommends thatyou use a 110-volt circuit that is protected by aground fault circuit interrupter.


65

*[ST11000(ALL)03/95] For best results, plug the heater in at least threehours before you start your vehicle. Using theheater for longer than three hours will notdamage the engine, so you can plug it in atnight to start your vehicle the followingmorning.


To prevent electrical shock, do not useyour heater with ungrounded electricalsystems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters.

%*[ST11200(ALL)03/95] If the Engine Cranks but DoesNot Start or Does Not Start Aftera Collision

%*[ST11300(ALL)11/95] Fuel Pump Shut-off Switch

*[ST11400(ALL)11/95] If the engine cranks but does not start or doesnot start even after a small collision, the fuelpump shut-off switch may have been activated.The shut-off switch is a device intended to stopthe fuel pump when your vehicle has beeninvolved in a substantial jolt.

[ST11500(ALL)10/95] Once the shut-off switch is activated, you mustreset the switch by hand before you can startyour vehicle. If you have a sedan, the switch ison the right side of the trunk behind the trunkliner. If you have a wagon, it is behind theservice panel on the right side of the cargo area.


66

[ST11600(ALL)11/94]

half page art:0000399-E

The right side of the trunk in the sedan

[ST11700(ALL)11/94]

one third page art:0000516-E

Inside the right side service panel in the wagon


If you see or smell fuel, do not reset theswitch or try to start your vehicle. Haveall the passengers get out of the vehicleand call the local fire department or atowing service.


67

*[ST11900(ALL)03/95] If your engine cranks but does not start after acollision or substantial jolt:

*[ST11950(ALL)04/95] 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.

*[ST12000(ALL)03/95] 2. Check under the vehicle for leaking fuel.

*[ST12050(ALL)01/95] 3. If you do not see or smell fuel, push the redreset button on the fuel pump shut-offswitch down.

*[ST12100(ALL)03/95] 4. Turn the ignition key to the ON position fora few seconds, then turn it to the OFFposition.

*[ST12150(ALL)03/95] 5. Check under the vehicle again for leakingfuel. If you see or smell fuel, do not startyour vehicle again. If you do not see orsmell fuel, you can try to start your vehicleagain.

*[ST12200(ALL)03/95] 6. Check all vehicle warning lights beforedriving the vehicle.

*[ST12225(ALL)01/95] Pushing

*[ST12250(ALL)09/95] Vehicles with automatic transaxles cannot bestarted by pushing. Follow the directions underIf Your Vehicle Needs a Jump-Start in the RoadsideEmergencies Chapter.


68

%*[ST12300(ALL)05/95] Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes

*[ST12400(ALL)02/95] Carbon monoxide, although colorless andodorless, is present in exhaust fumes. Takeprecautions to avoid its dangerous effects.


Do not start your vehicle in a closedgarage or other enclosed area. Never sit ina stopped vehicle for more than a shortperiod of time with the engine running.Exhaust fumes are toxic. See GuardingAgainst Exhaust Fumes in this chapter formore instructions.


If you smell exhaust fumes inside yourvehicle, have your dealer inspect yourvehicle immediately. Do not drive if yousmell exhaust fumes.

*[ST12700(ALL)01/95] Have the exhaust and body ventilation systemschecked whenever:

*[ST12800(ALL)02/95] ❑your vehicle is raised for service

*[ST12900(ALL)02/95] ❑ the sound of the exhaust system changes

*[ST13000(ALL)01/95] ❑your vehicle has been damaged in a collision


69

*[ST13200(ALL)01/95] Improve your ventilation by keeping all air inletvents clear of snow, leaves, and other debris.

*[ST13300(ALL)08/95] If the engine is idling while you are stopped inan open area for long periods of time, open thewindows at least one inch (2.5 cm). Also, adjustthe heating or air conditioning system to bringin outside air.

[ST13600(ALL)03/95] ❑ If you use the heater, set the fan speed oneither medium or HI with the select knob oneither R (floor) or VENT.

[ST13900(ALL)03/95] ❑ If you use the air conditioner, set the fanspeed on either medium or HI with the selectknob on A/C. (Do not use MAX A/C.)

[ST14000(ALL)03/95] ❑ If you use the automatic temperature control,set the fan speed on medium or high andpress the S (panel and floor) or R (floor)manual override button. (Do not use AUTOor MAX A/C.)


71

Warning Lights andGauges

%*[LG00500(ALL)05/92] In your vehicle, the warning lights and gaugesare grouped together on the instrument panel.We call this grouping a cluster. Your vehicle hasone of the following clusters:

[LG00800(ALL)02/95] ❑Standard cluster

[LG00900(ALL)02/95] ❑Optional cluster

[LG00950( T)02/95] ❑SHO cluster

*[LG01100(ALL)05/94] If you are not sure which cluster your vehiclehas, check the diagrams on the following pages.

% [LG02050(ALL)05/95] The Standard Cluster[LG02075(ALL)02/95] The following warning lights and gauges are on

the standard cluster. All of the warning lightsand gauges alert you to possible problems withyour vehicle. Some of the lights listed areoptional. The following sections detail what eachof these indicators means.

File:05fclgt.exUpdate:Tue Jan 23 08:14:15 1996

72

[LG02101(ALL)03/95]

fullpageart:0000663-H

Th

estan

dard

cluster

File:05fclgt.exU

pdate:T

ue Jan 23 08:14:15 1996

73

*[LG02400(ALL)01/95] Indicator Lights and Chimes%*[LG02500(ALL)07/95] Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime

*[LG02510(ALL)09/95] This warning light and chime remind you tofasten your safety belt. The following conditionswill take place:

[LG02550(ALL)12/95] ❑ If the driver’s safety belt is not buckled whenthe key is turned to the ON position, thelight will activate for 1 to 2 minutes and thechime will sound for 4 to 8 seconds.

*[LG02600(ALL)03/95] ❑ If the driver’s safety belt is buckled while thelight is on or the chime is sounding, both thelight and the chime will turn off.

[LG02650(ALL)12/95] ❑ If the driver’s safety belt is buckled before thekey is turned to the ON position, the lightwill briefly activate, then shut off and thechime will not activate.

[LG02700(ALL)02/95]

one inch art:0000107-B

Safety belt warning light

%*[LG02900(ALL)06/95] Brake System Warning Light

*[LG03000(ALL)03/95] The warning light for the brakes can show twothings — that the parking brake is not fullyreleased, or that the brake fluid level is low inthe master cylinder reservoir. If the fluid level islow, the brake system should be checked byyour dealer or a qualified service technician.


74

[LG03300(ALL)02/95]

one inch art:0000108-D

Brake system warning light

*[LG03500(ALL)01/95] This light comes on when the parking brake isset, or if it is not set, it comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition to the START position. Itnormally goes off shortly after the engine startsand you release the parking brake. If the lightstays on after you have fully released theparking brake, have the hydraulic brake systemserviced by your dealer or a qualified servicetechnician.

*[LG03700(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

The BRAKE light indicates that the brakesmay not be working properly. Have thebrakes checked immediately.

%*[LG03800(ALL)01/95] Charging System Light

*[LG03900(ALL)03/95] This light, shown as a battery symbol on yourcluster, indicates that your battery is not beingcharged and that you need to have the electricalsystem checked.

[LG04000(ALL)02/95]


Charging system light


75

*[LG04300(ALL)11/94] This light comes on every time you turn yourignition key to the ON or START position. Thelight should go off when the engine starts andthe alternator begins to charge.

*[LG04400(ALL)01/95] If the light stays on or comes on when theengine is running, have the electrical systemchecked as soon as possible.

%*[LG04800(ALL)02/95] Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light

[LG04900(ALL)02/95] This light indicates the engine’s oil pressure, notthe oil level. However, if the engine’s oil level islow, it could affect the oil pressure. The lightshould come on every time the ignition key isturned to the ON or START position, andshould turn off after the engine is running.

[LG04950(ALL)02/95]


Engine oil pressure warning light

[LG05100(ALL)11/94] If the light stays on or turns on when the engineis running, the engine has lost oil pressure andcontinued operation will cause severe enginedamage.

*[LG05105(ALL)03/95] If you lose engine oil pressure:

*[LG05200(ALL)03/95] 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible.

*[LG05300(ALL)11/94] 2. Shut off the engine immediately. If you donot stop the engine as soon as safelypossible, severe engine damage could result.


76

*[LG05400(ALL)10/95] 3. Check the engine’s oil level, following theinstructions on checking and adding engineoil in this Owner Guide. (See Engine oil inthe Index.) If you do not follow theseinstructions, engine damage could result. Toensure an accurate reading, your vehicleshould be on level ground.

*[LG05500(ALL)11/94] 4. If the level is low, add only as much oil asnecessary to bring it to the full level beforeyou start the engine again. Do not overfill.Do not operate the engine if the light is on,regardless of the oil level. Contact yournearest dealer for further service actions.

%*[LG06200(ALL)01/95] High Beam Light

*[LG06300(ALL)03/95] This light comes on when the headlamps areturned to high beam or when you flash thelights.

[LG06350(ALL)02/95] If your vehicle is equipped with DaylightRunning Lamps (DRL), the high beam light willnot come on when you flash the lights.

[LG06400(ALL)02/95]


High beam light


77

%*[LG06500(ALL)03/95] Door Ajar Light and Chime

[LG06800(ALL)03/95] This light comes on and a single chime sounds ifone of the doors or the liftgate or liftgatewindow (wagon) is not completely shut and theignition is in the ON position.

[LG06850(ALL)02/95]


Door ajar light

%*[LG07000(ALL)05/95] Chime for Headlamps On

*[LG07100(ALL)07/95] This chime sounds if the driver or any passengerdoor is open when the parking lamps orheadlamps are on. The chime sounds until youclose the door, turn off the lamps or turn theignition to the ON position.

[LG07200(ALL)03/95] A 3-second chime sounds after a 20-second delayif the ignition has been turned to the OFFposition, the parking lamps or headlamps areon, and no door has been opened.

%*[LG07400(ALL)01/95] Air Bag Readiness Light

*[LG07620(ALL)05/95] A problem with the system is indicated by oneor more of the following: the readiness light willeither flash or stay lit, or it will not light, or agroup of five beeps will be heard.

*[LG07640(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

If any of these things happen, evenintermittently, have the air bag systemserviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercurydealer immediately.


78

[LG07650(ALL)11/94]

one inch art:0000653-C

Air bag readiness light

%*[LG07700(ALL)11/94] Service Engine Soon Warning Light

*[LG07750(ALL)03/95] The Powertrain On-Board Diagnostic II (OBD II)system consists of the hardware and softwarenecessary to monitor the operation of thepowertrain. The OBD II system is designed tocheck the function of the vehicle’s powertraincontrol system during normal operation. If anemission problem is detected, the Service EngineSoon light (in the cluster) is turned on.

*[LG07775(ALL)05/95] Modification or additions to the vehicle maycause incorrect operation of the OBD II system.Additions such as burglar alarms, cellularphones, and CB radios must be carefullyinstalled. Do not install these devices by tappinginto or running wires close to powertrain controlsystem wires or components.

[LG07800(ALL)02/95]


Service engine soon light


79

[LG07825(ALL)03/95] This light comes on when you turn the ignitionkey to ON, but should turn off when the enginestarts. If the light does not come on when youturn the ignition to ON or if it comes on andstays on when you are driving, have yourvehicle serviced as soon as possible. Thisindicates a possible problem with one of thevehicle’s emission control systems. You do notneed to have your vehicle towed in.

[LG07851(ALL)10/95] If the light turns on and off at one (1) secondintervals while you are driving the vehicle, itmeans that the engine is misfiring. If thiscondition persists, damage could occur to theengine or catalytic converter. Avoid heavyacceleration and have your vehicle serviced atthe first opportunity. You do not need to haveyour vehicle towed in.

*[LG07875(ALL)05/95] If the light turns on and off on rare occasionswhile you are driving, it means that amalfunction occurred and the condition correcteditself.

[LG07900(ALL)03/95] An example of a condition which corrects itselfoccurs when an engine running out of fuelbegins to misfire. In this case, the Service EngineSoon Warning Light may turn on and will thenset a Diagnostic Trouble Code indicating that theengine was misfiring while the last of the fuelwas being consumed. After refueling, the ServiceEngine Soon Warning Light will turn off afterthe vehicle has completed three consecutivewarm up cycles without a misfire conditionoccurring. A warm up cycle consists of enginestart from a cold condition (engine at ambienttemperature) and running until the enginereaches normal operating temperature.


80

[LG07925(ALL)03/95] On the fourth engine start up, the ServiceEngine Soon Warning Light will turn off as soonas the engine begins to crank. It is not necessaryto have the engine serviced.

[LG07951(ALL)11/94] Under certain conditions, the Service EngineSoon light may come on if the fuel cap is notproperly installed. If the Service Engine Soonlight comes on and you suspect that the fuel capis not properly installed, pull off the road assoon as it is safely possible and turn off theengine. Remove and replace the fuel cap, makingsure it is properly seated.

[LG08001(ALL)02/95] After completing the three consecutive warm upcycles and on the fourth engine start up, theService Engine Soon warning light should turnoff. If the light does not go off after the fourthengine restart, have your vehicle serviced byyour dealer or a qualified technician.

% [LG08010(ALL)12/95] Low Fuel Light

[LG08015(ALL)12/95] This light comes on when your fuel gaugeindicates approximately 1/16 of a tank. Theignition must be turned to the ON position forthis light to come on. This light will glowsteadily.

% [LG08020(ALL)12/95]


Low fuel light


81

%*[LG08051(ALL)05/95] Turn Signal Indicator Lights

*[LG08102(ALL)09/95] The turn signal arrow will flash to indicate thedirection in which you are going to be turning.

*[LG08150(ALL)07/95]

one inch art:0010525-A

% [LG08251(ALL)11/94] Cruise Control Indicator Light(If equipped)

[LG08301(ALL)02/95] This light comes on when the cruise control ONswitch is pressed. It turns off when the cruisecontrol OFF switch is pressed or when theignition is turned to the OFF position.

[LG08351(ALL)02/95]


Cruise control indicator light

%*[LG08391(ALL)02/95] Anti-lock Brake System Warning Light(If equipped)

*[LG08392(ALL)01/95] This light comes on for a few seconds when youturn the ignition key to the START position. Itshould go off shortly after the engine starts. If itstays on longer than five (5) seconds, it indicatesthat your anti-lock brake system may not beworking properly. Normal braking is notaffected unless the BRAKE system warning lightalso remains on for longer than six (6) seconds.


82

You should have your vehicle servicedimmediately by your dealer or qualified servicetechnician to restore the benefits of the anti-lockfeature. See Anti-lock brakes in the Index for moreinformation.

[LG08394(ALL)03/95]

one inch art:0000674-D

Anti-lock brake system warning light

*[LG08396(ALL)10/93] Gauges%*[LG08400(ALL)01/95] Fuel Gauge

[LG08425(ALL)11/94] The fuel gauge displays approximately howmuch fuel is in the fuel tank only when theignition is in the ON position.

[LG08525(ALL)11/94] For proper fuel gauge indication after addingfuel, the ignition should be in the OFF positionwhile the vehicle is being refueled.

*[LG08625(ALL)06/93] The fuel gauge indicator may vary slightly whenthe vehicle is in motion.

[LG08725(ALL)11/94] With the ignition in the OFF position, the fuelgauge indicator may drift from the ignition ONindication.

%*[LG08800(ALL)01/95] Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge

*[LG08900(ALL)03/95] This gauge indicates the temperature of theengine coolant, not the coolant level. If thecoolant is not at its proper level or mixture, thegauge indication will not be accurate.

*[LG09000(ALL)08/95] The pointer moves from the C (cold) mark intothe Normal band as the engine coolant warmsup. It is acceptable for the pointer to fluctuatewithin the Normal band under normal driving


83

conditions. Under certain driving conditions,such as heavy stop and go traffic or driving uphills in hot weather, the pointer may move tothe top of the Normal band.

[LG09005(ALL)02/95]


Engine coolant temperature gauge

[LG09100(ALL)05/95] If, under any circumstances, the pointer movesabove the Normal band, the engine coolant isoverheating and continued operation may causeengine damage.

*[LG09150(ALL)01/95] If your engine coolant overheats:

*[LG09200(ALL)03/95] 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible.

*[LG09300(ALL)01/95] 2. Turn off the engine.

*[LG09400(ALL)05/95] 3. Let the engine cool.

*[LG09410(ALL)04/95] 4. Check the coolant level following theinstructions on checking and adding coolantto your engine, see Engine Coolant in theIndex. If you do not follow theseinstructions, you or others could be injured.

[LG09415(ALL)11/94] If the coolant continues to overheat, have thecooling system serviced.


84

%*[LG09800(ALL)01/95] Speedometer

*[LG09900(ALL)01/95] The speedometer tells you how many miles(kilometers) per hour your vehicle is moving.

%*[LG10000(ALL)01/95] Odometer

*[LG10100(ALL)01/95] The odometer tells you the total number of miles(kilometers) your vehicle has been driven.

%*[LG10200(ALL)11/94] Trip Odometer

*[LG10300(ALL)11/94] The trip odometer tells you how many miles(kilometers) your vehicle has been driven sincethe last reset. Press the reset button to return thetrip odometer to zero.

%*[LG10320(ALL)02/95] Tachometer

[LG10340(ALL)02/95] The tachometer tells you the approximate enginerevolutions per minute (how fast the engine isrunning). You may damage the engine if youdrive with the indicator in the red zone.

% [LG10350(ALL)12/95] The Optional and SHO Clusters[LG10360( T)02/95] The optional cluster and the SHO cluster have

indicator lights that are not on the standardcluster. For details about these lights, read theinformation below. To learn about the standardwarning lights and gauges that come on allclusters, see The Standard Cluster earlier in thischapter.

[LG10365( T)12/95] The optional cluster has a 120 mph (200 km/h)speedometer and a 7,000 rpm tachometer.

[LG10370( T)02/95] The SHO cluster also has a 150 mph (240 km/h)speedometer and an 8,000 rpm tachometer.


85

[LG10401(ALL)03/95]

fullpageart:0000644-I

Th

eop

tional

cluster

File:05fclgt.exU

pdate:T

ue Jan 23 08:14:15 1996

86

[LG10501(T)02/95]

fullpageart:0000665-N

Th

eS

HO

cluster

File:05fclgt.exU

pdate:T

ue Jan 23 08:14:15 1996

87

[LG14750(ALL)12/95] Low Coolant Light and Chime

[LG14850(ALL)04/95] This light indicates that the level of the enginecoolant is low inside the coolant reservoir.

[LG14950(ALL)04/95]


Low coolant light

[LG15000(ALL)12/95] This light comes on for a few seconds whenyour ignition key is turned to the ON position,but should turn off when the engine starts. If thecoolant is low, the light will come on and asingle chime will sound. If this light stays on,check the level of coolant inside the coolantreservoir. For instructions on adding coolantmixture, see Engine coolant in the Index.

% [LG15150(ALL)12/95] Low Washer Fluid Light

*[LG15250(ALL)02/95] This light comes on if the reservoir is less than aquarter full when you turn on the windshieldwashers.

[LG15350(ALL)04/95]


Low washer fluid light

% [LG16100(ALL)12/95] Rear Lamp Out Indicator

[LG16200(ALL)12/95] This light indicates that a rear tail lamp orbrakelamp is not functioning. It comes onmomentarily when the ignition is turned to theON position, then goes out.


88

[LG16220(ALL)02/95] This light will come on to show a rear tail lampburnout when the light switch is turned to theparking lamp or headlamp position.

[LG16260(ALL)04/95] This light will come on to show a brakelampburnout only when the brake pedal is pressed.

[LG16280(ALL)02/95] The light will stay on until the ignition is turnedto the OFF position.

[LG16300(ALL)02/95]


Rear lamp out light

[LG16400(ALL)12/91] NOTE: The warning light may not work oryou may get a false reading if you usetrailer lights or use improperreplacement bulbs.

[LG16700(ALL)12/95] Anti-Theft Alarm Light

[LG16800(ALL)11/94] This light is used when you set the anti-theftalarm system. See Anti-theft system in the Index.

[LG16825(ALL)02/95]


Anti-theft alarm light


89

[LG16950(ALL)12/95] Overdrive Off Indicator

[LG16975(ALL)02/95] This light tells you that the Overdrive Off (O/DOFF) switch on the gearshift lever has beenpushed. When the light is on, the transaxle willnot shift into overdrive. Depressing the O/DOFF switch located below the gearshift releasebutton on the floor gearshift or located on theend of the column gearshift will return thevehicle to “overdrive on” mode. The transaxlewill be in the “overdrive on” mode when thevehicle is started even if the “O/D OFF” modewas selected when the vehicle was last shut off.

[LG17025(ALL)02/95] If the light does not come on when the O/DOFF switch is depressed or if the light flasheswhen you are driving, have your vehicleserviced at the first opportunity. If this conditionpersists, damage could occur to the transaxle.

[LG17050(ALL)02/95]


Overdrive off indicator


91

Instrument Panel Controls

[IP00400(ALL)05/95] The main controls for the climate control system,clock, and radio are in the oval IntegratedControl Panel on the instrument panel.

[IP00410(ALL)04/95] The controls for the lights and climate control airregisters are also on the instrument panel.

*[IP00420(ALL)03/95] Clean the instrument panel lens and woodtonetrim with a soft cloth and a glass cleaner. Donot use paper towel or any abrasive cleaner toclean either the lens or the woodtone trim asthese may cause scratches.

%*[IP00430(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Any cleaner or polish that increases thegloss (shine) of the upper part of theinstrument panel should be avoided.The dull finish in this area is to helpprotect the driver from undesirablewindshield reflection.

File:06fcipt.exUpdate:Tue Jan 23 08:13:16 1996

92

%[IP00470(ALL)04/95]

fullpageart:0000661-J

Instru

men

tp

anel

File:06fcipt.exU

pdate:T

ue Jan 23 08:13:16 1996

93

%*[IP00500(ALL)06/95] The Climate Control Systems

*[IP00600(ALL)06/95] Your vehicle has one of the following climatecontrol systems:

[IP00900(ALL)08/95] ❑Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System

[IP01000(ALL)04/95] ❑Electronic Automatic Temperature Control(EATC) System

*[IP01100(ALL)06/95] If you are not sure which system your vehiclehas, see the diagrams on the following pages.

% [IP03150(ALL)08/95] Manual Heating and Air ConditioningSystem

[IP03175(ALL)03/95]


The knobs that control the manual heating and airconditioning system

[IP03200(ALL)08/95] Fan speed knob

[IP03250(ALL)08/95] The fan speed knob controls the volume of aircirculated in the vehicle. There are four fanspeeds: LO, medium/low (first dot),medium/high (second dot), and HI.

[IP03300(ALL)08/95] Function selector knob

[IP03351(ALL)08/95] The function selector knob controls airflow tothe inside of the vehicle.


94

*[IP03401(ALL)08/95] MAX A/C

[IP03450(ALL)08/95] MAX A/C uses recirculated air to cool thevehicle. It allows for faster cooling but is noisierthan A/C. The airflow will be from theinstrument panel registers.

*[IP03501(ALL)08/95] A/C

[IP03550(ALL)04/95] A/C uses outside air to cool the vehicle. It isquieter that MAX A/C, but not as economical.The airflow will be from the instrument panelregisters.

%*[IP03601(ALL)03/95] VENT

[IP03650(ALL)03/95] VENT brings in outside air through theinstrument panel registers. It can be used forheating or ventilating.

[IP03701(ALL)08/95] OFF

[IP03750(ALL)08/95] In OFF, outside air is shut out and the fan willnot operate.

[IP03801(ALL)04/95] S (Panel and floor)

[IP03850(ALL)04/95] This brings in outside air through the instrumentpanel registers and the front and rear floorducts. It can be used for heating or ventilating.

*[IP03901(ALL)08/95] R (Floor)

[IP03950(ALL)04/95] This allows for maximum heating. The airflow isfrom the front and rear floor ducts.


95

[IP04001(ALL)04/95] P (Floor and defrost)

[IP04050(ALL)04/95] This brings in outside air through the floor ductsand the windshield defroster ducts. It can beused for heating or ventilation.

%*[IP04100(ALL)08/95] V (Defrost)

[IP04150(ALL)04/95] This brings in outside air through thewindshield defroster ducts. It can be used toclear ice or fog from the windshield.

[IP04200(ALL)08/95] Temperature control knob

[IP04250(ALL)08/95] The temperature control knob may be adjustedfrom cool (blue range) to warm (red range).

%*[IP04700(ALL)04/95] Electronic Automatic Temperature ControlSystem

[IP04725(ALL)12/95] The control for your Electronic AutomaticTemperature Control (EATC) is located at thecenter of the instrument panel in the IntegratedControl Panel and will operate only when theignition is turned to the ON position.

*[IP04825(ALL)05/95] The EATC feature maintains the temperatureyou select and automatically controls the airflowfor your comfort. It also allows you to overridethe automatic operation with manual overridebuttons.


96

[IP04925(ALL)12/95]

fullpageart:0001285-D

Th

eE

lectronic

Au

tomatic

Tem

peratu

reC

ontrol

System

File:06fcipt.exU

pdate:T

ue Jan 23 08:13:16 1996

97

[IP05025(ALL)03/95] To turn your EATC on, press the AUTO buttonor any of the six manual override buttons alongthe bottom of the control.

[IP05125(ALL)03/95] To turn your EATC off, press the OFF button.When the system is off, the Display window willbe blank (dark).

[IP05225(ALL)02/95] If you select AUTO, the system willautomatically determine fan speed and airflowlocation. If a manual override button is selected,your selection determines airflow location only.Fan speed remains automatic unless youoverride it by pressing either side of the FANspeed button located at the extreme left of thecontrol panel.

*[IP05250(ALL)10/95] Temperature selection

[IP05275(ALL)10/95] The TEMP button at the upper left of theControl is for temperature selection. The a sideof the TEMP button will increase the settemperature and the b side of the TEMP buttonwill lower the set temperature. Pressing thebutton and releasing it will change the settemperature one degree. Holding either side ofthe button in will rapidly change thetemperature setting in one degree increments toeither 65˚F (18˚C) or 85˚F (29˚C). Then, the settemperature will jump 5˚F(3˚C) and stop ateither 60˚F (16˚C) which is maximum cooling or90˚F (32˚C) which is maximum heating.

[IP05325(ALL)10/95] To change the temperature, select anytemperature between 6O˚F (16˚C) and 90˚F(32˚C) by pressing the a or b side of theTEMP button. The EATC will display theselected temperature.


98

[IP05425(ALL)03/95] If you want continuous maximum cooling, pressthe b side of the TEMP button until 60˚F (16˚C)is shown in the display window. Your EATCwill cool at maximum and disregard the 60˚F(16˚C) setting until you select a warmertemperature with the a side of the TEMPbutton. If you want continuous maximumheating, press the a side of the TEMP buttonuntil 90˚F (32˚C) is shown in the displaywindow. Your EATC will provide maximumheat regardless of the 90˚F (32˚C) setting untilyou select a cooler temperature with the b sideof the TEMP button.

[IP05525(ALL)12/95]

one third page art:0001286-D

The display window

[IP05625(ALL)02/95] The display window will indicate the selectedtemperature and the operating function youhave chosen: AUTO or one of the six manualoverrides. It will also indicate manual control ofthe fan speed with the word FAN, H, and dots.The display window with all possible displaysand their positions are shown here. Normallynot all are shown at the same time but areincluded here to familiarize you with the namesand symbols.


99

[IP05650(ALL)10/95] Changing the display from farenheit tocelsius

[IP05675(ALL)10/95] To change the temperature display fromFarenheit to Celsius, depress the MAX A/C andV F-DEF at the same time and hold themdown for about a second. To change back to theoriginal setting, repeat the process. If the batteryis disconnected, the display will revert toFahrenheit and must be reset to Celsius.

*[IP05725(ALL)01/95] Automatic operation

[IP05825(ALL)03/95] Press the AUTO button and select the desiredtemperature. The selected temperature andAUTO will be shown in the Display window.The EATC will automatically heat or cool toachieve the set temperature. Under normalconditions, your EATC will need no additionalattention.

[IP05925(ALL)02/95]


The AUTO temperature display

[IP06025(ALL)03/95] When in AUTO and weather conditions requireheat, air will be sent to the floor. But a feature isincluded in your EATC to prevent blowing coldair to the floor if the engine coolant is not warmenough to allow heating. The EATC will directthe airflow to the windshield at low fan speed.In 3-1/2 minutes or less, the fan speed will startto increase and the airflow will change to thefloor area.


100

[IP06100(ALL)03/95] When in AUTO and weather conditions requirecooling, the EATC will use outside air orrecirculated air, depending on the temperaturethat is selected.

[IP06125(ALL)04/95] If unusual conditions exist (i.e., window fogging,etc.), the six manual override buttons allow youto select special air discharge locations. The fanspeed button allows you to adjust the fan speedto suit your needs.

[IP06625(ALL)11/94] Fan speed button

[IP06725(ALL)04/95] Your EATC automatically adjusts the fan speedto the existing conditions. You must press AUTOfor automatic fan speed operation. To control thefan speed yourself, use the button which willcancel the automatic fan speed control. Thebutton is located at the left side of the EATCcontrol panel. It is marked H. Press the (-) sidefor lower speeds. Press the (+) side for higherspeeds.

[IP06925(ALL)03/95] When you press the fan speed button, the fanspeed will go to manual control. The displaywindow will show the word FAN, H and aseries of dots along with the selectedtemperature and operating function.

[IP07025(ALL)02/95]


The fan display


101

[IP07125(ALL)12/95] You can override the fan speed at any time. Ifyou use the button to control the fan speed, theEATC will continue to control the temperaturebut you control the fan speed. To return to autofan control, press the AUTO button. If you areoperating in one of the override functions (S,MAX A/C, etc.), automatic fan control willcontinue unless you press the fan speed button.To return to automatic fan control, press theAUTO button. The EATC will return toautomatic operation. If you want to return toany override function, press the button for thatfunction. The fan speed will continue to beautomatically controlled.

*[IP07225(ALL)01/95] Manual override buttons

[IP07325(ALL)04/95] Your EATC has six buttons which allow you tomake special selections. The buttons are locatedalong the bottom edge of the EATC and allowyou to determine where the air will bedischarged. Pressing any override buttonchanges the air discharge location only. It doesnot affect the ability of the system to controltemperature or the fan speed. Return to fullyautomatic operation by pushing the AUTObutton.

*[IP07425(ALL)01/95] MAX A/C button

[IP07525(ALL)04/95] The MAX A/C feature allows for faster coolingbecause air is drawn from inside the vehicle.Using inside air causes the fan to sound louderwhich is normal for this selection. The displaywindow will change to indicate MAX A/C andthe airflow will be from the instrument panelregisters. To exit, push AUTO or any of theother five manual override buttons.


102

%*[IP07625(ALL)01/95] VENT button

[IP07725(ALL)03/95] Press this button to select outside air throughthe instrument panel registers. The displaywindow will show the set temperature andVENT to the lower right of the temperature.Your EATC will heat the air if the temperatureyou have selected is warmer than the outside aircoming into the vehicle. However, the air willNOT be cooled regardless of the temperaturesetting. Airflow will be from the instrumentpanel registers.

[IP07825(ALL)04/95] S (Panel and floor) button

[IP07925(ALL)02/95] Push this button to get air from the floor andinstrument panel registers at the same time. Thedisplay will show the set temperature and S.Depending on the selected temperature, the airwill be automatically heated or cooled.

[IP08025(ALL)04/95] R (Floor)

[IP08125(ALL)03/95] Airflow will be to the floor when the R (floor)button is pressed. The display window willshow the set temperature and R (floor) to theright of the temperature. Fan speed will beautomatic unless manually controlled. If youoverride the fan speed and wish to return toautomatic fan control, press AUTO. Then, againselect R (floor) for airflow to the floor.

[IP08225(ALL)04/95] P (Floor and defrost)

[IP08325(ALL)02/95] Press this button to get air to the floor andwindshield defrosters at the same time. Thedisplay will show the set temperature and P. Ifthe outside temperature is about 50˚F (10˚C) andabove, the air will be dehumidified to removemoisture. This will help to prevent fogging inhumid weather.


103

% [IP08425(ALL)07/95] V F-DEF (Front defrost)

[IP08525(ALL)02/95] Press the V F-DEF (front defrost) button toobtain maximum airflow to the windshield.Adjust the temperature setting as required fordefrosting. The Display window will show thetemperature setting with V to the right of thetemperature. When the outside temperature isabout 50˚F (10˚C) and above, the air will bedehumidified to remove moisture. This will helpprevent fogging in humid weather.

[IP08625(ALL)04/95] OUTSIDE TEMP button

[IP08725(ALL)05/95] When this button is pressed, the temperature ofthe air outside of the vehicle will show in thedisplay window. If the EATC is off, the displaywill go blank after 4 seconds. If the EATC is on,the outside temperature will be shown until theOUTSIDE Temp button is pressed a second timeor another override button is pressed.

*[IP08825(ALL)01/95] NOTE: The outside temperature reading ismost accurate when the vehicle ismoving. Higher readings may beobtained when the vehicle is notmoving. The readings that you get maynot agree with temperatures given onthe radio due to differences in vehicleand station locations.

*[IP08850(ALL)04/95] Service

*[IP08875(ALL)04/95] If your EATC is not operating as described here,take it to your dealer to have it checked. Systemdiagnostics are built in which will allow yourdealer to readily identify problems that mightoccur.


104

[IP08925(ALL)04/95] Operating tips

*[IP09025(ALL)03/95] The following tips will help you to get the mostsatisfaction from your climate control system.

[IP09125(ALL)04/95] ❑ In humid weather, select V F-DEF (frontdefrost) before driving. This will help toprevent windshield fogging. After a fewminutes of operation, switch to any desiredselection.

*[IP09325(ALL)03/95] ❑Do not put objects under the front seats thatinterfere with the flow of air to the back seatarea.

[IP09425(ALL)04/95] ❑Remove any snow, ice, or leaves from the airintake area of your climate control systemwhich could block the air intake. The intakearea is located at the bottom of thewindshield, under the hood at the passengerside rear corner.

[IP09500(ALL)03/95] ❑ If the air conditioner performs well in MAXA/C but not in A/C, this may indicate thatthe MicronAirH filter (if equipped) needs tobe replaced.

[IP10000(ALL)03/95] MicronAirH Air Filter (If equipped)

*[IP10100(ALL)02/95] Your vehicle may have an air filter that removespollen and road dust from outside air before itis directed to the interior of the vehicle. Formaintenance of this filter, see Servicing YourTaurus.

% [IP21650(ALL)04/95] Rear Window Defroster and Heated SideView Mirrors

*[IP21700(ALL)02/95] The defroster for the rear window clears frost,fog, or thin ice from both the inside and outsideof the rear window and activates the heated sideview mirrors.

[IP21900(ALL)04/95] The button for the rear defroster and heated sideview mirrors is on the instrument panel.


105

[IP22200(ALL)04/95]

one inch art:0000651-E

The button that controls the rear window defroster andheated side view mirrors

[IP22300(ALL)04/95] Clear away any snow that is on the rearwindow and side view mirrors before using thedefroster. With the engine running, push thedefrost button. After 10 minutes, the defrosterwill turn off. If the window and mirrors are stillnot clear, push the defroster button again. Thedefroster will turn off when the ignition key isturned to the OFF position.

%*[IP23000(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Never use sharp instruments orwindow cleaners with abrasives toclean the inside of your rear window.If you do, you may damage the heatingelements that are bonded to the insideof the rear window and cause damageto the rear window defroster.

% [IP23200(ALL)12/95] Liftgate Window Wiper and Washer(If equipped)

[IP23401(ALL)04/95]

quarter page art:0000696-E

The liftgate window wiper and washer switches

[IP23500(ALL)04/95] To turn on the liftgate window wiper, press theb switch. To turn the liftgate window wiperoff, press the switch again.


106

[IP23550(ALL)04/95] To turn on the liftgate window washer, press thed switch. When the d switch is pressed, it alsoturns on the liftgate wiper.

%*[IP23600(ALL)01/95] The Interior and Exterior Lights%*[IP23700(ALL)01/95] Turning On the Exterior Lights

[IP23800(ALL)12/95] To turn on your headlamps, parking lamps, sidemarkers, license plate lamps and tail lamps, usethe knob that is to the left of the steering wheel.

[IP24200( T)10/95]

one third page art:0000695-C

The knob for the headlamps, parking lamps, license platelamps and tail lamps

[IP24500(ALL)12/95] To turn on the parking lamps, side markers,license plate lamps and tail lamps, turn the knobto “P” or the first position.

[IP24600(ALL)12/95] To turn on the headlamps, parking lamps, sidemarkers, license plate lamps and tail lamps, turnthe knob to the second position.


107

[IP25200(ALL)03/95]


Turning on the high beams

% [IP25250(ALL)02/89] To change your headlamps from low to highbeam, push the turn signal lever away from you.To change them back to low beam, pull thelever toward you.

*[IP25300(ALL)03/93] For more information about how the high beamheadlamps work, see Steering column controls inthe Index.

%*[IP25605(ALL)01/95] Daytime Running Light System

[IP25610(ALL)03/95] (Canadian and fleet vehicles only)

*[IP25615(ALL)03/95] The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system isdesigned to turn the high beam headlamps on,with a reduced light output and withoutilluminating the high beam indicator lamp in theinstrument panel. The DRL system operateswhen all of the following conditions are met:

*[IP25620(ALL)03/95] ❑The vehicle is “running.”

*[IP25625(ALL)01/95] ❑The vehicle has a fully released parkingbrake.

*[IP25630(ALL)03/95] ❑The headlamp system is in the OFF position.

*[IP25635(ALL)09/95] NOTE: If you have a vehicle with anautomatic lighting system, the DRLsystem is active until the automaticsystem turns on the headlamps.


108

*[IP25636(ALL)09/95] NOTE: The high beam indicator will not turnon in the flash-to-pass mode duringnighttime driving.

[IP25637(ALL)01/95] You may notice that the lights flicker when thevehicle is turned on or off. This is a normalcondition.

*[IP25638(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

The Daytime Running Light (DRL) systemwill not illuminate the tail lamps andparking lamps. Turn on your headlampsat dusk. Failure to do so may result in acollision.

%*[IP25640(ALL)08/95] Cleaning the Exterior Lamps

*[IP25650(ALL)08/95] Do not use dry paper towel, chemical solventsor abrasive cleaners to clean the lamps, as thesemay cause scratches or crack the lamps.

%*[IP26600(ALL)02/95] Setting the Autolamp Delay System(If equipped)

*[IP26700(ALL)02/95] The autolamp sets the headlamps to turn on andoff automatically. You can use the autolamp to:

*[IP26800(ALL)01/95] ❑ turn on the lamps automatically at night

*[IP26900(ALL)01/95] ❑ turn off the lamps automatically duringdaylight

[IP27000(ALL)11/94] ❑keep the lamps on for up to three minutesafter you turn the ignition to the OFFposition.


109

[IP27100(ALL)02/95]


The autolamp system on the left side of the instrumentpanel

*[IP27400(ALL)01/95] To set the autolamp:

*[IP27450(ALL)05/95] 1. Make sure the headlamp knob is in the OFFposition. If the knob for the headlamps isON, you cancel the autolamp.

*[IP27550(ALL)01/95] 2. Turn the ignition key to ON or start yourvehicle.

*[IP27650(ALL)01/95] 3. Find the autolamp thumbwheel to the left ofthe steering wheel on the instrument panel.

[IP27750(ALL)02/95] 4. Turn the autolamp thumbwheel past the stopto the beginning of the MAX position. Theindicator light will come on.

*[IP27850(ALL)01/95] 5. The autolamp automatically turns the lampson and off for you.

[IP27950(ALL)10/95] Do not put any articles on top of the photocellthat is located in the top right corner of theinstrument panel. This photocell controls theautolamp. If you cover it, the photocell reacts asif it is nighttime, and the lamps turn on.

*[IP28050(ALL)01/95] To turn the autolamp off, move the thumbwheelback to OFF.


110

*[IP28500(ALL)01/95] You can set the autolamp so the headlamps stayon for up to three minutes after you turn yourvehicle off.

*[IP28600(ALL)01/95] To keep the lamps on after you leave yourvehicle:

*[IP28650(ALL)01/95] ❑Turn the thumbwheel as far into the MAXrange as you want.

*[IP28750(ALL)01/95] ❑The further you move the thumbwheel intothe DELAY area (toward the MAX position),the longer the lamps will stay on after youleave your vehicle. Similarly, if you move thethumbwheel only slightly into the DELAYarea, your lamps will stay on only for amoment after you turn your vehicle off.

%*[IP29800(ALL)01/95] Lighting Up the Interior and InstrumentPanel

*[IP30000(ALL)05/95] With the light knob in the parking lamps or theheadlamps position, you can brighten or dim thelights in the instrument panel. To do this, usethe thumbwheel to the left of the steering wheel.This wheel also turns on the interior lights withthe light knob on or off.

% [IP30300(ALL)02/95]


The thumbwheel that controls the light on the instrumentpanel


111

[IP30700(ALL)11/94] To dim the instrument panel lights, rotate thethumbwheel down. To turn on the interiorlights, turn the thumbwheel all the way up. Theinterior lights also come on when any side dooror the liftgate is opened.

% [IP30925(ALL)03/95] Dome Lamps

[IP30950(ALL)03/95] The front dome lamp is located overheadbetween the driver and front passenger seats.However, if your vehicle is equipped with apower moon roof, the dome lamp is locatedbehind the moon roof.

[IP30975(ALL)11/94] In the wagon, the rear dome lamp is locatedoverhead near the rear seating positions.

[IP31025(ALL)02/95]


The dome/map lamp

[IP31050(ALL)03/95] Turn the map lamps on and off with theswitches on the lamp. The dome lampilluminates when any door is opened. If eitherthe driver’s or passenger’s front door is openedusing the outside door handle, the light willremain on for 25 seconds after the door has beenshut. If any other door is opened or if either ofthe front doors is opened using the insidehandle, the lamp will immediately turn off whenthe door is closed.


112

[IP31075(ALL)11/94]

quarter page art:0001377-A

The dome lamp

[IP31100(ALL)03/95] The dome lamp will stay illuminated if theswitch is pushed to the ON position. The domelamp will stay off if the switch is pushed to theOFF position. When the switch is positioned tothe door/middle position, the dome lamp willcome on when either of the front doors or theliftgate (wagon) is opened.

[IP31125(ALL)03/95] The rear dome lamp also illuminates when theliftgate is opened and goes off when it is closed.

[IP31150(ALL)11/94]


The map lamps on the moon roof console

[IP31175(ALL)11/94] Turn each map lamp on the moon roof consoleon and off with the switch near that lamp.


113

%*[IP31200(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Interior Lamps

*[IP31300(ALL)04/95] Your interior dome lamps and map lamps areplastic and should be cleaned with a milddetergent diluted in water. Rinse them with clearwater.

%*[IP31400(ALL)01/95] Battery Saver

[IP31500(ALL)11/94] When the ignition is turned off, the vehicle willturn off battery voltage to the interior lightsafter 40 minutes.

*[IP31600(ALL)09/95] This will prevent draining of the battery if thoselights have been left on inadvertently or if adoor is not completely closed. Battery voltage tothese lamps will be restored when the outsidefront door handles are lifted, the keyless entrykeypad is used, the remote entry transmitter isused, any door is opened, the trunk is opened,or the ignition key is turned to the ON position.

%*[IP32600(ALL)03/95] Clock[IP33200(ALL)03/95]

quarter page art:0000247-G

The digital clock

*[IP33750(ALL)05/95] 1. To set the hour, press and hold the hourbutton. When the desired hour appears,release the button.

*[IP33850(ALL)05/95] 2. To set the minutes, press and hold theminute button. When the desired minuteappears, release the button.


115

Steering Column Controls

*[SC00400(ALL)01/95] The controls on the steering column and wheelare designed to give you easy access to thecontrols while you are driving.

%*[SC00500(ALL)01/95] The Turn Signal Lever

*[SC00600(ALL)01/95] You can use the turn signal lever on the left sideof the steering column to:

*[SC00700(ALL)07/94] ❑operate the turn signals

*[SC00800(ALL)01/95] ❑ turn the high beams on/off

*[SC00900(ALL)05/95] ❑ flash the lamps

*[SC01000(ALL)01/95] ❑ turn the windshield wipers and washeron/off

%*[SC01100(ALL)01/95] Turn Signals

*[SC02201(ALL)03/95] Move the lever up to signal a right turn. Moveit down to signal a left turn. The correspondingindicator light in the instrument cluster willflash.

*[SC02401(ALL)03/95] If the turn signal stays on after you turn, movethe lever back to the center (off) position.

*[SC02451(ALL)08/95] For lane changes, move the lever far enough tosignal but not to latch. The lever will return tothe off position when you release it.

%*[SC02800(ALL)08/95] High Beams

*[SC03100(ALL)05/95] To turn on the high beams, turn the headlampcontrol knob to the headlamp ON position andpush the turn signal lever away from you untilit latches. When the high beams are ON, thehigh beam indicator light on the instrumentpanel comes on.

File:07fcsct.exUpdate:Mon Jan 22 15:52:32 1996

116

*[SC03200(ALL)05/95] To turn off the high beams, pull the levertoward you until it latches. The high beamindicator light turns off.

%*[SC03300(ALL)08/95] Flashing the Lights

*[SC03400(ALL)06/95] To flash the headlamps, pull the lever towardyou for a moment and then release it. Theheadlamps will flash whether the headlampknob is in the on or off position.

[SC03450(ALL)04/95]


The turn signal lever

%*[SC03500(ALL)08/95] Windshield Wipers and Washer

*[SC03600(ALL)03/95] To turn on the windshield wipers, the ignitionkey must be turned to the ON or ACC position.

[SC03900(ALL)05/94] Turn the knob on the end of the turn signallever away from you to activate the wipers. Thefirst seven detents are interval wipe positions,the eighth detent is the LO position, and theninth detent is the HI position.

*[SC04000(ALL)01/95] To turn the wipers off, turn the knob towardyou to the OFF position.


117

%*[SC04100(ALL)08/95] Variable Interval Wipers

*[SC04300(ALL)01/95] In addition to two speed wipers, your vehiclehas wipers that you can set to operate atvarying intervals. For example, you can set theinterval so they wipe less often when it drizzlesor more often in heavier rain.

[SC04500(ALL)04/95]


The variable interval wiper on the turn signal lever

*[SC04925(ALL)03/94] To set the interval wipers, turn the knob at theend of the turn signal lever toward or awayfrom you until the wipers are going at thedesired interval.

*[SC04950(ALL)08/95] Windshield Washer

[SC05000(ALL)05/94] To clean the windshield, push in the end of thewiper switch knob. For a constant spray, keepthe knob pushed in. After you release the knob,the wipers operate for two to three cycles beforeturning off (if the wipers were off) or returningto HI, LO, or the interval setting selected.

[SC05050(ALL)04/95] For information about the rear washer on thewagon, see Windshield washer fluid and wipers inthe Index.


118

*[SC05100(ALL)03/95] If the washer does not work, check the washerfluid level and fill it if it is low. See the ServicingYour Taurus chapter. If there is enough fluid,consult your nearest Ford or Lincoln-Mercurydealer.

*[SC05300(ALL)08/95] Do not try to clean the windshield when thewasher fluid container is empty or activate thewashers at any time for more than 15 secondscontinuously. This could damage the washerpump system.

*[SC05350(ALL)08/95] RWARNING

In freezing weather, the washer solutionmay freeze on the windshield and obscureyour vision. Always warm up thewindshield with the defroster before youuse the washer fluid. If you cannot seethrough the windshield clearly, it canincrease the risk of being involved in acollision.

*[SC05500(ALL)08/95] For information about refilling the washer fluidor replacing your windshield wiper blades, seeWindshield washer fluid and Wipers in the Index.

%*[SC05520(ALL)03/95] Hazard Flasher[SC05540(ALL)05/89]


Using the hazard flasher switch


119

*[SC05560(ALL)03/95] The hazard flasher serves as a warning to otherdrivers to be careful when approaching orpassing your vehicle.

*[SC05590(ALL)03/95] The flashers work whether your vehicle isrunning or not. The flashers work for up to twohours when the battery is fully charged and ingood condition without draining the batteryexcessively. If the flashers run for longer thantwo hours or if the battery is not fully charged,the battery can be drained.

%*[SC05600(ALL)01/95] Horn

*[SC05800(ALL)05/95] To sound the horn, push the center pad area ofthe steering wheel.

[SC06000(ALL)02/95]


The horn on the steering wheel

%*[SC06210(ALL)05/95] Tilt Steering


Never adjust the steering column/wheelwhen the vehicle is moving. You couldlose control of the vehicle and injuresomeone.


120

[SC06650(ALL)11/94]


The lever to tilt the steering wheel

*[SC06800(ALL)04/95] To change the position of the steeringcolumn/wheel, pull the release lever on thecolumn toward you. Tip the steering wheel tothe desired position. Release the lever to lock thesteering wheel in place.

%*[SC07400(ALL)03/91] Cruise Control (If equipped)

*[SC07500(ALL)06/95] If your vehicle has cruise control, you canautomatically maintain a constant speed at orabove 30 mph (50 km/h).

*[SC07550(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Do not shift to N (Neutral) when usingthe cruise control. This will cause theengine to overspeed.

*[SC07600(ALL)06/95] Use of radio transmitting equipment that is notFederal Communications Commission (FCC) orin Canada the Canadian Radio andTelecommunications Commission (CRTC)approved may cause the speed control tomalfunction. Therefore, use only properlyinstalled FCC (CRTC in Canada) approved radiotransmitting equipment in your vehicle.


121

[SC08000(ALL)11/94]


The cruise control buttons on the steering wheel

*[SC08200(ALL)08/95] To set the cruise control:

[SC08400(ALL)11/94] 1. Press and release the ON switch. TheCRUISE indicator light in the instrumentcluster will illuminate to indicate that speedcontrol is in a standby mode.

*[SC08500(ALL)08/95] 2. Accelerate to the desired speed above30 mph (50 km/h) using the acceleratorpedal.

*[SC08800(ALL)08/95] 3. Press the SET ACCEL switch and release itimmediately to set your speed. If you keepthis switch pressed, your speed will continueto increase.

*[SC08900(ALL)08/95] 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.Your vehicle will maintain the speed you set.

*[SC09000(ALL)08/95] If you drive up or down a steep hill, yourvehicle may momentarily slow down or speedup, even though the speed control is on. This isnormal.


122

[SC09011(ALL)09/95] NOTE: If your speed increases above your setspeed while driving in j (Overdrive)on a downhill grade, you may want toshift to D (Drive) to reduce vehiclespeed (or, turn j [Overdrive] off bydepressing the O/D OFF switch on thegearshift lever). The cruise controlcannot reduce the vehicle speed if itgoes above your set speed on adownhill grade. For the best fueleconomy during normal drivingconditions, leave the gearshift in j(Overdrive), or resume as soon aspractical.


Do not use the speed control in heavytraffic or on roads that are winding,slippery, or unpaved.

%*[SC09200(ALL)08/95] Accelerating With the Cruise ControlOperating

*[SC09300(ALL)08/95] You can use the accelerator pedal to speed upmomentarily. When you take your foot off theaccelerator, the vehicle will return to the setspeed.

% [SC09340(ALL)09/95] NOTE: When driving in hilly terrain, at highaltitudes, or when pulling a trailer, youmay want to drive in D (Drive) (orturn j [Overdrive] off by depressingthe O/D OFF switch). This willimprove cruise control performance.


123

[SC09350(ALL)03/95] NOTE: When driving uphill, especially with aheavy load, you may notice your speeddecreasing even if you have the cruisecontrol set. If the speed drops morethan 8 to 14 mph (13-23 km/h) it isnormal for the automatic cruise controlfeature to be cancelled. You may needto use the accelerator pedal to helpyour vehicle maintain the selectedspeed when driving up steep grades.

%*[SC09400(ALL)08/95] Resetting the Cruise Control

*[SC09410(ALL)08/95] To reset the cruise control to a lower speed, useone of the following procedures:

*[SC09415(ALL)08/95] ❑COAST — Press and hold the COAST switch.Release the switch when the vehicle slowsdown to the desired speed.

*[SC09420(ALL)08/95] ❑Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicleattains the desired speed, press the SETACCEL switch and release it immediately.

% [SC09425(ALL)11/94] ❑TAP-DOWN — Press and then quicklyrelease the COAST switch. Each time you“tap” the switch, the set speed will decreaseby 1 mph (1.6 km/h). Multiple taps willcause the set speed to decrease in incrementsof 1 mph (1.6 km/h). For example, if thecurrent set speed is 60 mph (96 km/h) 5 tapsof the COAST switch will decrease thevehicle speed and SET it at 55 mph(88 km/h).

*[SC09430(ALL)08/95] If vehicle speed is reduced below 30 mph(50 km/h) by any of the above methods, thenyou must manually accelerate to a speed over30 mph (50 km/h) and reset the system.


124

[SC09435(ALL)02/95] To reset the cruise control to a higher speed,use one of the following procedures:

*[SC09440(ALL)08/95] ❑ACCEL — Press and hold the SET ACCELswitch. Release the switch when the vehiclehas accelerated to the desired speed.

*[SC09445(ALL)08/95] ❑Depress the accelerator pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed, press theSET ACCEL switch and release itimmediately.

% [SC09450(ALL)11/94] ❑TAP-UP — Press and then quickly release theSET ACCEL switch. Each time you “tap” theswitch, the set speed will increase by 1 mph(1.6 km/h). Multiple taps will cause the setspeed to increase in increments of 1 mph(1.6 km/h). For example, if the current setspeed is 55 mph (88 km/h) 5 taps of the SETACCEL switch will increase the vehicle speedand SET it at 60 mph (96 km/h).

*[SC10900(ALL)11/95] Cancelling and Resuming a Set Speed

[SC11000(ALL)04/95] If you press the brake pedal, cruise control iscancelled. You can return to the set speed bypressing the RESUME switch, as long as you didnot press the OFF switch. You must be drivingat least 30 mph (50 km/h).

*[SC11300(ALL)05/95] Your vehicle will gradually return to thepreviously set speed and then maintain it.

%*[SC11315(ALL)08/95] To Turn Off the Cruise Control System

*[SC11325(ALL)08/95] Press the OFF switch.

*[SC11400(ALL)10/95] In addition, the cruise control is turned off eachtime you turn the vehicle ignition off.


125

Features

*[FV00400(ALL)02/95] Your vehicle has a variety of features designedfor your comfort, convenience and safety. Readthis chapter to find out about standard andoptional features.

%*[FV00500(ALL)01/95] Doors% [FV01700(ALL)11/94] Childproof Locks

[FV01800(ALL)02/95] In addition to standard or power locks, yourvehicle has childproof locks for the rear doors. Ifyou set these locks, the doors cannot be openedfrom the inside of the vehicle. The doors can stillbe opened from the outside when the lock knobsare raised.

[FV02200(ALL)10/95]

half page art:0000448-D

The childproof locks for the rear door

File:08fcfvt.exUpdate:Mon Jan 22 15:57:12 1996

126

*[FV02300(ALL)03/95] To set the childproof lock on each rear door,open the rear door.

[FV02500(ALL)02/95] Find the lever inside the label. Move the leverup to the locked symbol.

[FV02700(ALL)02/95] To release the childproof lock, open the reardoor from the outside. Move the lever down tothe unlocked symbol.

%*[FV03700(ALL)04/95] Power Door Locks (If equipped)

[FV03830(ALL)02/95] If your vehicle has power door locks, thecontrols to lock the doors are on the trim panelof the front door. When you close the doorsafter you set the door locks, the doors remainlocked. If the power mechanism ever fails, themanual door lock will override the powercontrols.

[FV03950(ALL)11/94]


The power locks on the driver’s door

[FV04000(ALL)04/95] If the key is left in the driver’s or passenger’soutside lock cylinder for a period of time, thepower door locks may cycle. This is a protectivefeature and will not harm the locks. When thekey is removed, the locks will function normally.


127

[FV04010(ALL)04/95] Central Locking

[FV04020(ALL)04/95] When you are unlocking the driver or frontpassenger door with the key, turn it oncetoward the front of the vehicle to unlock thatdoor only. Turn the key a second time to unlockall doors. Turn the key once toward the rear ofthe vehicle to lock all doors.

[FV04050(ALL)04/95] Lock Disable

[FV04075(ALL)03/95] The lock disable feature helps prevent you fromlocking the keys in your vehicle. With the key inthe ignition (in any switch position) and thedriver’s door open, the driver’s door cannot belocked using the front door power lock switch.

[FV04100(ALL)02/95] Your vehicle can still be locked, while the key isin the ignition, by manually pressing down thelock button.

[FV04125(ALL)02/95] Power liftgate lock — wagon (If equipped)

[FV04150(ALL)02/95] The power liftgate lock is on the right insidetrim panel in the cargo area. When this lock ispressed, all doors and the liftgate lock.

[FV04175(ALL)02/95]


The power liftgate lock


128

%*[FV04251(ALL)09/95] Using the Keyless Entry System(If equipped)

*[FV04301(ALL)02/95] If your vehicle has the keyless entry system, youcan lock or unlock the vehicle doors withoutusing a key. The buttons for the system are nearthe outside door handle on the driver’s side. Seealso Remote Entry System which follows thisdescription.

[FV04351(ALL)02/95]


Keyless entry buttons

*[FV04401(ALL)02/95] When you bought your vehicle, you were givena computer code that operates the system foryour vehicle. For your convenience, we haveduplicated this code in two places.

*[FV04451(ALL)09/95] The code is:

*[FV04501(ALL)09/95] ❑on your owner’s wallet card found in theglove compartment

*[FV04551(ALL)02/95] ❑ taped to the computer module

*[FV04601(ALL)05/95] When you use this entry system, the illuminatedentry system turns on the interior lights for 25seconds and the buttons on the keypad light upfor 5 seconds. Do not push the buttons with akey, ballpoint pen, pencil or any other hardobject. These objects could damage the buttons.


129

%*[FV04651(ALL)09/95] Programming your own entry code

*[FV04700(ALL)02/95] You can program a personal code to unlockyour vehicle with the keypad. This code doesnot replace the permanent code that thedealership gave you. Use your personal code inthe same manner as you would your originalcode.

*[FV04751(ALL)09/95] To program your own code:

*[FV04801(ALL)09/95] 1. Select five digits for your personal code.

*[FV04851(ALL)09/95] 2. Enter the permanent code that the dealershipgave you.

*[FV04901(ALL)09/95] 3. Within five seconds, press 1/2.

*[FV04951(ALL)09/95] 4. Within five seconds of pressing 1/2, enteryour personal code, pressing each digitwithin five seconds of the previous digit.

*[FV05000(ALL)09/95] The keyless entry system registers thissecond code. To open your vehicle, you cannow use either code. The module remembersonly one personal code at a time. Entering asecond personal code will erase the first,replacing it with the new second one.

*[FV05050(ALL)09/95] To erase your personal code:

*[FV05101(ALL)09/95] 1. Enter the original permanent code.

*[FV05150(ALL)09/95] 2. Press 1/2 within five seconds of Step 1.

*[FV05201(ALL)09/95] 3. Wait six seconds.

*[FV05250(ALL)09/95] The keyless entry system automaticallyerases your personal code. The system willnow only respond to the permanent code.


130

*[FV05301(ALL)09/95] Do not set a code that presents the numbers insequential order, such as 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 9/0.Studies show that people who idly press thebuttons usually press a sequential pattern. Also,do not select a code that uses the same buttonfive times. Thieves can easily figure out thesetypes of codes.

%*[FV05350(ALL)09/95] Unlocking the doors with the keyless entrysystem

*[FV05401(ALL)02/95] You must unlock the driver’s door before youunlock any of the other doors. If you let morethan five seconds pass between pressingnumbers, the system shuts down, and you haveto enter the code again. The system has shutdown if the keypad light is out. If the keylessentry system does not work properly, use thekey or transmitter(s) to lock and unlock thedoors.

*[FV05450(ALL)09/95] 1. To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factorycode or your personal code. All codes havefive numbers. After you press the fifthnumber, the driver’s door unlocks.

[FV05500(ALL)04/95] 2. To unlock the passenger’s door(s) andliftgate (wagon), press the 3/4 button withinfive seconds of unlocking the driver’s dooror re-enter the code to open the driver’sdoor, then press 3/4.

[FV05525(ALL)03/95] 3. To open the trunk (sedan) or unlock theliftgate (wagon), enter the five-digit factorycode, then press the 5/6 button within 5seconds.


131

*[FV05550(ALL)09/95] Locking the doors with the keyless entrysystem

*[FV05601(ALL)09/95] Along with unlocking your doors, you can usethe keyless entry system to lock the doors. Youcan also use the Autolock feature toautomatically lock the doors after you get in thevehicle.

*[FV05650(ALL)02/95] To lock all of the doors, press 7/8 and 9/0 atthe same time. It is not necessary to first enterthe keypad code. This will arm your factoryinstalled anti-theft system, if so equipped.

[FV05701(ALL)03/95] Arming, disarming and resetting yourperimeter anti-theft system (If equipped)from the keyless entry pad

*[FV05750(ALL)05/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the optionalfactory installed anti-theft system, the keylessentry system will arm it when you use the 7/8and 9/0 keys to lock the doors, and will disarmor reset a triggered anti-theft alarm when youenter in the five digit code to unlock the driver’sdoor.

*[FV05800(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Doors and the liftgate must be fullyclosed for the anti-theft system to arm.Refer to the Anti-Theft System sectionin this chapter for more details.


132

[FV05850(ALL)04/95] Autolock (If equipped)

*[FV05900(ALL)02/95] The Autolock feature is part of your remotekeyless entry system and is enabled at thefactory. With the Autolock feature enabled, all ofthe doors will automatically lock when:

[FV05950(ALL)04/95] ❑ the vehicle doors and liftgate are fully closed

*[FV06001(ALL)09/95] ❑ the ignition key is turned to the ON position

*[FV06050(ALL)02/95] ❑ the brake pedal is pressed

*[FV06100(ALL)02/95] ❑you shift through (Reverse)

*[FV06150(ALL)11/95] ❑one second has elapsed after the brake pedalis released

*[FV06200(ALL)09/95] The Autolock feature will repeat when:

[FV06250(ALL)04/95] ❑a door is opened and then all doors andliftgate are closed

[FV06300(ALL)12/95] ❑ the brake pedal is released

*[FV06400(ALL)02/95] The doors may not lock automatically at thecorrect time if the driver:

*[FV06450(ALL)02/95] ❑ shifts through gears without pressing thebrake

*[FV06500(ALL)02/95] ❑ shifts through gears quickly after starting thevehicle

*[FV06550(ALL)02/95] ❑ releases their foot from the brake whilesomeone has stepped out of the vehicle for amoment

*[FV06575(ALL)04/95] You can deactivate the system by using thebuttons for the keyless entry system if you don’twant to use the Autolock feature.


133

*[FV06600(ALL)05/95] To deactivate the Autolock system:

*[FV06650(ALL)06/95] 1. Enter your permanent five-digit entry code(not the personal code you may have set).

*[FV06700(ALL)09/95] 2. Within 5 seconds, press and hold 7/8.

*[FV06750(ALL)09/95] 3. Within 5 more seconds, press and release3/4.

*[FV06800(ALL)09/95] 4. Release 7/8.

*[FV06850(ALL)02/95] To reactivate the Autolock system, simply repeatthe instructions for deactivating the system. Byre-entering the code that deactivates theAutolock, the keyless entry system reinstates theAutolock feature.

*[FV06900(ALL)04/95] You can also deactivate or reactivate theAutolock feature by this method:

[FV06950(ALL)04/95] 1. Make sure the anti-theft system is not armedor triggered, ignition is off, and all doorsand liftgate are closed.

*[FV07000(ALL)02/95] 2. Turn the ignition key from OFF to RUN.

*[FV07050(ALL)02/95] 3. Press the door power unlock button 3 times.

*[FV07100(ALL)02/95] 4. Turn the ignition key from RUN to OFF.

*[FV07150(ALL)02/95] 5. Press the door power unlock button 3 times.

*[FV07200(ALL)02/95] 6. Turn the ignition key back to RUN within 30seconds of step 2.

*[FV07250(ALL)02/95] 7. The horn should chirp once. If not, wait 30seconds and repeat steps 1 through 6.

*[FV07300(ALL)02/95] 8. Press the door power unlock button.

*[FV07350(ALL)02/95] 9. Press the door power lock button.

*[FV07400(ALL)02/95] 10. The horn will chirp once if the Autolockfeature was deactivated, twice (one shortchirp followed by a long chirp) if theAutolock feature was activated.

*[FV07450(ALL)02/95] 11. Turn the ignition OFF.


134

*[FV07550(ALL)03/95] Remote Entry System (If equipped)

*[FV07600(ALL)02/95] If your vehicle has the remote entry system, youcan lock or unlock the vehicle doors and liftgatewithout using a key. The remote also has apersonal alarm feature. The buttons for thesystem are located on the two hand heldtransmitters that came with your vehicle.

*[FV07650(ALL)06/95] The system will work with up to fourtransmitters. Your vehicle came with twotransmitters. Additional transmitters can beordered from your dealer.

*[FV07700(ALL)02/95] The remote entry features only operate with theignition in the OFF position.

[FV07751(ALL)02/95]


Remote entry transmitter

%*[FV07801(ALL)02/95] Unlocking the doors with the remote entrysystem

*[FV07851(ALL)02/95] To unlock the driver’s door, press the UNLOCKbutton.

[FV07901(ALL)12/95] To unlock the other doors and liftgate (wagon),press the UNLOCK button a second time, withinfive seconds after the first UNLOCK.

[FV07910(ALL)04/95] To open the trunk (sedan), press the TRUNKbutton.


135

[FV07920(ALL)04/95] To unlock the liftgate (wagon), press the TRUNKbutton. To open the liftgate, you must press theliftgate release located above the license plate.

*[FV07951(ALL)02/95] Locking the doors with the remote entrysystem

[FV08001(ALL)12/95] To lock all the doors and liftgate (wagon), pressthe LOCK button. This will also arm the factoryinstalled Anti-Theft system.

[FV08051(ALL)04/95] If you would like a signal that the doors arebeing locked, press the LOCK button againwithin five seconds. If all doors and the liftgateare completely closed, the doors and liftgate willlock again, the horn will chirp and the externallamps will flash. If a door or the liftgate is openor ajar, the horn will give two short chirpswarning you that a door or the liftgate is open.

%*[FV08100(ALL)02/95] Remote entry personal alarm

*[FV08151(ALL)02/95] If you wish to activate the remote entry systempersonal alarm, press the PANIC button. Thiswill honk the horn and flash the lights forapproximately 2 minutes 45 seconds. You canturn it off by pressing the PANIC button againfrom the transmitter or by turning the ignitionto the ON or ACCESSORY position.

*[FV08200(ALL)02/95] When you use the remote entry UNLOCK orPANIC buttons, the illuminated entry systemturns on the vehicle’s interior lights for 25seconds. You can turn these lights off with theremote entry LOCK button or by turning theignition to the ON or ACCESSORY position.


136

[FV08251(ALL)04/95] THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OFTHE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECTTO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSEHARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THISDEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANYINTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDINGINTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSEUNDESIRED OPERATION.

%*[FV08300(ALL)04/95] Arming and Disarming the Alarm Systemwith Remote Entry

*[FV08351(ALL)04/95] Your Remote Entry System will automaticallyarm the factory installed Anti-Theft System whenthe doors are locked, and automatically disarm itwhen the doors are unlocked. The remote willalso reset the anti-theft alarm (when the driver’sdoor is unlocked or the PANIC button is pressedon a programmed remote entry transmitter) if itwas triggered.

*[FV08400(ALL)04/95] The remote entry system may not arm anddisarm non-factory installed anti-theft systems.

%*[FV08451(ALL)02/95] Replacing the batteries

*[FV08500(ALL)02/95] The remote entry transmitter is powered by twocoin type three-volt lithium 2016batteries (included) that should last for severalyears of normal use. If you notice a significantdecrease in operating range, the batteries shouldbe replaced. Replacement batteries can bepurchased at most pharmacies, watch stores orat your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.


137

*[FV08551(ALL)02/95] NOTE: The operating range of the remoteentry system can also be affected byweather conditions (such as very coldtemperatures) or structures around thevehicle (buildings, other vehicles, radioand TV towers, etc.). Typical operatingrange will allow you to be up to 33feet (10 meters) away from yourvehicle.

*[FV08600(ALL)02/95] The transmitter can be snapped apart to replacethe batteries by twisting a thin coin between thetwo halves of the transmitter. DO NOT TAKETHE FRONT PART OF THE TRANSMITTERAPART. When installing the new batteries, besure to place the positive (+) side down asmarked. Snap the two halves back together.

[FV08651(ALL)02/95]


Replacing the batteries

%*[FV08700(ALL)02/95] Replacing lost transmitters

*[FV08751(ALL)06/95] In the event a transmitter is lost, you shouldtake all your vehicle’s transmitters to yourdealer to have the remote entry systemdeprogrammed for the lost transmitter. This isnecessary to prevent further unauthorized use ofthe lost transmitter.

*[FV08800(ALL)02/95] You can also purchase additional transmitters(up to 4 transmitters can be used) from yourdealer. You will need to take all yourtransmitters to the dealer so they can programthem to the remote entry system all at the sametime.


138

[FV08851(ALL)04/95] Illuminated Entry System

[FV08900(ALL)10/95] This system will provide illumination of thevehicle’s interior courtesy lamps when eitheroutside driver’s door keypad is pressed or whenthe remote entry system is used to unlock thedoor or sound the personal alarm. The systemwill automatically turn off after approximately25 seconds or when the ignition is turned to theRUN or ACC position.

*[FV08951(ALL)09/95] NOTE: The inside lights will not turn off ifyou have turned them on with thedimmer thumbwheel or if any door isopen.

[FV09551(ALL)04/95] Perimeter Anti-Theft System (If equipped)

*[FV09600(ALL)05/95] When armed, this system helps protect yourvehicle against break-ins or theft.

%*[FV09651(ALL)05/95] When an unauthorized entry occurs, the systemtriggers and will:

*[FV09700(ALL)02/95] ❑ flash the headlamps, parking lamps, and theftindicator lamp

*[FV09751(ALL)06/95] ❑honk the horn

%*[FV09801(ALL)05/95] Arming the system

*[FV09851(ALL)04/95] The system is ready to arm any time the ignitionswitch is turned OFF and the alarm is nottriggered or sounding. Any of the followingevents will prearm the anti-theft system:

[FV09900(ALL)04/95] ❑Pressing the remote entry transmitter LOCKbutton to lock the doors (with the doors openor closed).

[FV09951(ALL)10/95] ❑Pressing the 7/8 and 9/0 buttons on theKeyless Entry Keypad at the same time tolock the doors (with the doors open orclosed).


139

*[FV10001(ALL)04/95] ❑Opening a door and pressing the power doorlock button to lock the doors.

[FV10050(ALL)04/95] ❑Turning the driver’s or front passenger’s doorkey to the LOCK position to centrally lock alldoors (with the doors open or closed).

[FV10100(ALL)12/95] If a door or liftgate (wagon) is open, theanti-theft system is prearmed and waiting for alldoors to close. The THEFT inidcator in theinstrument panel will light continuously whilethe system is prearmed.

[FV10201(ALL)12/95] Once all doors and liftgate (wagon) are closed, ifany were open, the system will begin a 30second countdown to become armed. The 30second countdown allows people who may stillbe in the vehicle time to exit without triggeringthe alarm. The THEFT indicator will glowsteadily until the system is armed. When thesystem is armed, the THEFT indicator will beginto flash with short flashes every 2 seconds untilthe system is triggered or disarmed.

[FV10251(ALL)12/95] Remember, all doors and liftgate (wagon) mustbe fully closed for the anti-theft system to arm.If a door or liftgate (wagon) has been left openor ajar, and you press the remote entrytransmitter twice to confirm the doors arelocked, two short horn chirps will warn you thatthe anti-theft system is not arming.

*[FV10301(ALL)05/95] The anti-theft system is designed to work withthe factory installed remote entry system. It maynot work with other remote entry systems.

*[FV10351(ALL)02/95] When you get a single horn chirp by pressingthe LOCK button twice within 5 seconds onyour remote entry transmitter, you can beassured that all doors are locked and theanti-theft system is arming.


140

[FV10400(ALL)04/95] Disarming the system

*[FV10451(ALL)10/95] An armed or activated system can be disarmedif you:

*[FV10501(ALL)04/95] ❑Unlock the doors by pressing the remoteentry transmitter UNLOCK button.

*[FV10551(ALL)04/95] ❑Unlock the doors by entering the unlock codeon the keyless entry keypad.

[FV10601(ALL)12/95] ❑Unlock any door or the liftgate (wagon) witha key.

*[FV10651(ALL)02/95] ❑Turn ignition to the ON or ACC position.

*[FV10700(ALL)04/95] ❑Pressing the remote entry PANIC button willdisarm the anti-theft system only when theanti-theft alarm is triggered and sounding.

*[FV10751(ALL)02/95] When unlocking the vehicle with a key, turn thekey all the way to the end of its travel or thesystem may not disarm.

[FV10800(ALL)09/95] NOTE: the flashing lights and honking hornwill shut off automatically within 2minutes 45 seconds after the system istriggered. It will trigger again ifanother intrusion occurs.

[FV10802(ALL)04/95] Coded Key Anti-Theft System

[FV10806(ALL)10/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the coded keyanti-theft system, you can only use anelectronically coded key to start the vehicle.During each vehicle start sequence, the codedkey is “read” by the anti-theft system. If thekey’s ID code matches that in the anti-theftsystem, the vehicle is enabled to start. If thekey’s ID code does not match the anti-theftsystem, or if no coded key is detected, then thevehicle is not able to start. Your vehicle wasequipped with two electronically coded keys.The coded ignition key is larger than normaldue to the electronics located in the head of the


141

key. Additional spare keys, maximum of 14, canbe purchased either through your dealership orselected retailers. Be sure to purchase only codedkeys with a Ford or Mercury logo on it toensure proper functionality. If both suppliedkeys are lost or stolen or only one key has beenlost and you want to ensure that key will notstart the vehicle, the vehicle must be taken tothe dealership for re-initialization. (All keys mustbe brought to the dealer, if any.)

[FV10808(ALL)04/95] THEFT indicator

*[FV10810(ALL)10/95] The indicator provides system proveout andoperating status. The system activates theindicator when the ignition switch is placed inthe ON or START position. This indicator helpsto determine possible fault conditions and/ornormal operating proveout. The system willilluminate the indicator for two (2) seconds thengo out to acknowledge normal operatingconditions. If the indicator does not illuminate atkey ON or flashes, have the system serviced.

*[FV10812(ALL)10/95] Spare Key Programming Procedure

*[FV10814(ALL)10/95] Two electronically coded keys were suppliedwith your vehicle, use one of these with theprocedure below:

*[FV10816(ALL)10/95] ❑Using a coded key that you can start yourengine with, turn the ignition from the ON tothe OFF position.

*[FV10820(ALL)10/95] ❑Within 15 seconds, insert a new key into theignition and turn it to ON or START. Thevehicle does not have to be started.

*[FV10825(ALL)10/95] If the key has been coded, the theft indicatorwill illuminate for two seconds. The key canthen be used to start the vehicle.

*[FV10826(ALL)10/95] Repeat until all chosen keys have been coded(max=16).


142

*[FV10828(ALL)10/95] If the key coding failed, the theft indicator willflash and the vehicle cannot be started. One of 3causes are possible:

*[FV10830(ALL)10/95] ❑The new key was not inserted within 15seconds or

*[FV10832(ALL)10/95] ❑All 16 key codes have been stored or

[FV10835(ALL)04/95] ❑The key does not have an electronic code.

%*[FV10850(ALL)02/95] Windows%*[FV10900(ALL)02/95] Using the Power Windows

*[FV10950(ALL)02/95] Each door has a power control that opens andcloses the window on that door. The driver’sdoor has a master control panel that operates allfour windows.

[FV11001(ALL)02/95] The power windows only operate when theignition key is in the ON or ACC position orwhen the ignition has been turned from the ONto the OFF position and/or the key has beenremoved and no front doors on the vehicle havebeen opened.

[FV11050(ALL)02/95] The power window controls are illuminated.

*[FV11100(ALL)08/95] RWARNING

Do not let children play with the powerwindows. They may seriously hurtthemselves. Make sure occupants are clearof the window(s) before closing.


143

[FV11150(ALL)04/95]


The master controls on the driver’s door

[FV11201(ALL)12/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a “one touchdown” feature. This feature allows the driver tofully open the driver’s window by firmlypressing the switch and then releasing. The “onetouch down” feature can be stopped by pressingthe up or down switch again.

[FV11250(ALL)02/95]


The window controls on the passenger’s door

[FV11270(ALL)03/95] Accessory Delay

[FV11290(ALL)04/95] The power windows and moon roof (ifequipped) can be operated for 45 seconds afterthe ignition has been turned to the OFF positionif the front doors have not been opened.


144

%*[FV11301(ALL)02/95] Moon Roof (If equipped)[FV11351(ALL)03/95] You can use the moon roof in your vehicle in

two ways. Move it back to open the glass panel,or you can move it up to ventilate the vehicle.

[FV11400(ALL)02/95] The moon roof will only operate when theignition is in the ON or ACC position or whenthe key has been removed from the ignition andno doors have been opened.

[FV11451(ALL)02/95]


The map lamps and the switches for the moon roof

[FV11500(ALL)02/95] The roof console SLIDE switch is used to openand close the moon roof.

[FV11550(ALL)04/95] Press the AUTO portion of the switch and theroof will fully open automatically. Press theswitch again during the opening cycle and theroof will stop at that location.

[FV11600(ALL)04/95] To close the moon roof, press and hold the frontportion of the switch. At the fully closedposition, the motor automatically turns off.

[FV11850(ALL)02/95] The roof console TILT switch is used to tilt themoon roof.

[FV11900(ALL)04/95] To tilt the moon roof into vent position from theclosed position, press the UP portion of theswitch.


145

*[FV12000(ALL)07/95] To close from vent position, press and hold therear portion of the switch.


Do not let children play with the moonroof. They may seriously hurt themselves.

*[FV12200(ALL)01/95] Occasionally wiping the outside guide rail coversof the moon roof with a clean cloth will helpkeep the moon roof working properly.

[FV12300(ALL)11/94]


The moon roof

*[FV12400(ALL)01/95] Sliding Shade

*[FV12500(ALL)01/95] The moon roof has a sliding shade that you canmanually open or close to block the sun whenthe glass panel is shut.

*[FV12600(ALL)05/95] To close the sliding shade, pull the shade towardthe front of the vehicle. The shade automaticallyopens and locks when the moon roof is opened.

%*[FV12700(ALL)01/95] Seats%*[FV12702(ALL)04/95] Head Restraints

*[FV12704(ALL)02/95] If you use them properly, head restraints areintended to help protect your head and neck ina collision.

*[FV12705(ALL)05/95] A head restraint helps protect you best if youposition it behind your head and not behindyour neck.


146

*[FV12706(ALL)02/95] Standard head restraints

*[FV12708(ALL)01/95] You can adjust the head restraints for yourcomfort and protection.

[FV12714(ALL)02/95]


Adjusting the standard head restraint

*[FV12720(ALL)06/95] Four-way head restraints

[FV12722(ALL)05/94] Your vehicle may have a four-way headrestraint. It can be adjusted in four directions.You can raise it about two inches (five cm) fromits normal position, and you can move itforward up to 60 degrees until you reach thedesired position.

[FV12724(ALL)03/92]


Adjusting the four-way head restraint


147

%*[FV12900(ALL)08/95] Manual Seats

[FV13000(ALL)04/95] You can move the front seats forward orbackward and tilt the seatback forward orbackward.

[FV13200(ALL)04/95]

quarter page art:0000421-C

The front seat adjustment bar

[FV13300(ALL)04/95]


The handle to recline the back of the driver’s seat


Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatbackwhen the vehicle is moving.


To reduce the risk of serious injury in acollision, always drive and ride with yourseatback upright and the lap belt snugand low across the hips.


148


Do not pile cargo higher than theseatbacks to avoid injuring people in acollision or sudden stop.

%*[FV21900(ALL)02/95] Power Seats (If equipped)

[FV22000(ALL)02/95] If your vehicle has power seats, you can adjustthe driver’s seat in several directions. You canraise or lower the whole front seat, move theseat forward or backward and tilt the front andback of the seat up or down. If your vehicle isequipped with power lumbar support, thelumbar switch also lets you inflate a pad on theseatback.

[FV22200(ALL)02/95]


The seat controls on the driver’s seat


149

% [FV22800(ALL)05/94] Inflating the lumbar support (If equipped)

[FV22950(ALL)04/89] To inflate the pads, press and hold the front ofthe switch. To deflate the pads, press and holdthe back of the switch.

[FV23000(ALL)11/94]


The seat controls for the lumbar support on the driver’sseat

%*[FV23100(ALL)11/94] Using the Split-Folding Rear Seat

*[FV23125(ALL)11/94] Your vehicle is equipped with split-folding rearseats. One or both rear seatbacks can be foldeddown to provide additional cargo space.

[FV23150(ALL)04/95] Detach the shoulder belt from the lap belt in thecenter rear seating position before folding downthe passenger side of the rear seat.

[FV23175(ALL)11/94] To lower the rear seatback from inside thevehicle:

[FV23225(ALL)02/95] 1. Lift the seatback release handle on the upperoutboard corner of the seatback.

[FV23250(ALL)02/95] 2. Grasp the pull tab and fold the seatbackforward until it rests on the cushion.


150

[FV23260(ALL)04/95]


Folding down the rear seatbacks

[FV23275(ALL)05/95] To raise the seatback:

[FV23325(ALL)02/95] 1. Lift the seatback rearward until it is in theupright position. Push the center of the seatuntil you hear it latch.

[FV23330(ALL)05/95] 2. Make sure the seatback is locked in positionby pushing forward and backward on it.


Securely latch the seatback in the uprightposition to prevent the seatback or objectsfrom being thrown forward during asudden stop or collision.

[FV23375(ALL)11/94] To lower the rear seatback from the trunk:

[FV23390(ALL)11/94] 1. Move the release lever on the back of therear seatback to the OPEN position.

[FV23420(ALL)11/94] 2. Fold the seatback forward.


151

[FV23421(ALL)04/95]


The seatback release lever in the trunk

%*[FV23422(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Seats

*[FV23424(ALL)08/95] Leather

*[FV23426(ALL)05/95] For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with asoft, damp cloth. For more thorough cleaning,wipe the surface with a leather and vinyl cleaneror a mild soap.

%*[FV23427(ALL)04/95] Fabric

*[FV23428(ALL)05/95] Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broomor a vacuum cleaner. Remove fresh spotsimmediately. Follow the directions that comewith the cleaner.

*[FV23429(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Before using any cleaner, test it on asmall, hidden area of fabric. If thefabric’s color or texture is adverselyaffected by a particular cleaner, do notuse it.


152

% [FV23500(ALL)04/95] Positive Retention Driver’s SideFloor Mat (If equipped)

[FV23520(ALL)04/95] Installing the Floor Mat

*[FV23530(ALL)01/95] Position the floor mat in the footwell. Place themat eyelet over the pointed end of the retentionpost from the rear and rotate forward to install.Adjust the floor mat position to allow properoperation of accelerator pedal, brake pedal andclutch pedal.

[FV23550(ALL)11/94]


The positive retention floor mat

[FV23560(ALL)04/95] Removing the Floor Mat

*[FV23570(ALL)01/95] Lift floor mat just forward of retention post androtate rearward to disengage from retentionpost.


153

%*[FV23600(ALL)01/95] Mirrors%*[FV24800(ALL)05/95] Side View Mirrors

% [FV25200(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle comes with electric adjustable andheated side view mirrors. The outside rearviewmirror on the right is a convex mirror. Thismirror gives you a wider view of the lanes onyour right and behind you.

[FV25600(ALL)04/95] RWARNING

Be careful. The convex outside rearviewmirror on the right makes objects appearsmaller and farther away than theyactually are. Use the inside rearviewmirror (or look behind you) to determinethe actual size and distance of objects thatappear in the convex mirror.

[FV25800(ALL)11/94]


The mirror controls on the driver’s door

[FV26200(ALL)04/95] To adjust the side view mirrors

*[FV26900(ALL)01/95] 1. Find the control switch in the driver’s doorpanel.

[FV27000(ALL)02/95] 2. Select the right or left mirror by moving theselector switch to the right or the left.

*[FV27100(ALL)01/89] 3. Move the control knob in the direction youwant to move the mirror.


154

*[FV27200(ALL)06/94] 4. Return the selector switch to the middleposition to keep the mirror in place.

[FV27250(ALL)02/95] 5. To activate the heated feature of the outsiderearview mirror, turn on the rear windowdefrost by pushing the R-DEF button on theinstrument panel.

%*[FV27275(ALL)01/95] Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirrorwith harsh abrasives, fuel or otherpetroleum-based cleaning products.

%*[FV27300(ALL)05/95] Sun Visors

*[FV27400(ALL)03/95] Using the Sun Visors

[FV27500(ALL)05/94] Your vehicle may have special sun visors.Besides the regular sun visor, you may have asecond sun visor. By using both the regular sunvisor and the second visor, you shield the sunfrom both the front and the side of the vehicleat the same time.

*[FV27600(ALL)03/95] To block the sun, move the main visor sidewaysand flip the second visor down.

[FV27700(ALL)11/94]


The sun visor


155

%*[FV27800(ALL)05/94] Turning on the Mirror Light on the SunVisors (If equipped)

[FV28500(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle has two different kinds of lightedmirrors. Your vehicle may have one or both ofthese lighted mirrors.

[FV28600(ALL)11/94] To turn on the driver’s mirror that is attached tothe visor, lift the mirror cover. Adjust theamount of light by sliding the switch.

[FV28700(ALL)11/94]


The mirror on the driver’s sun visor

[FV28900(ALL)11/94]


The mirror on the passenger’s sun visor

[FV29100(ALL)11/94] To turn on the passenger’s mirror that is in themain visor, grasp the lower center portion andpull the mirror down. Adjust the amount oflight by sliding the switch.


156

%*[FV29400(ALL)01/95] Console

*[FV29500(ALL)01/95] Your vehicle may have a full console. The fullconsole has the following features:

[FV29601(ALL)04/95]

two third page art:0000432-G

Features of the full console

[FV29650(ALL)04/95] The release for opening the utility compartmentis on the front of the console, just below thearmrest. Press and release at the ridges, near thedriver’s seat, to open. The lid is spring-loadedand will open automatically.


157

[FV29675(ALL)04/95] If your vehicle is equipped with a cellularphone, press the latch release located on thedriver’s-side edge of the lid to access the phone.

[FV29750(ALL)11/94] To open the cupholder on the full console, pressand release the door on the front of the console.The door is spring-loaded and will openautomatically.

[FV29875(ALL)04/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the columnshift, it has a center seating/stowage console inthe center front seating position. The centerseating/stowage console has the followingfeatures:

[FV29900(ALL)04/95]


Features of the center seating/stowage console

[FV29925(ALL)04/95] To open the storage compartment, raise thearmrest and pull the strap on the seat up andtoward the instrument panel.

% [FV29950(ALL)04/95] The cupholders in the center seating/stowageconsole can be removed for cleaning.


158


Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hardobjects can injure you in a collision.

% [FV30101(ALL)04/95] Cellular Phone (If equipped)[FV30201(ALL)04/95] For information about the cellular phone in your

vehicle, refer to the Cellular Phone User’s Manualprovided with your phone. For further questionsabout your cellular phone, contact the FordCellular System at 1-800-367-3013 (U.S.). InCanada, please contact your dealer.

*[FV30301(ALL)09/95] NOTE: It is recommended that you fold yourcellular phone antenna down onto theback glass before entering a car wash.

[FV30400(ALL)04/95] Ashtrays[FV30500(ALL)04/95] The ashtray can be converted to a storage

compartment for small objects by removing theplastic heatproof liner.

[FV30600(ALL)09/95] NOTE: The heatproof plastic liner must be inposition for use as an ashtray.

%*[FV32100(ALL)01/95] Trunk

*[FV32200(ALL)01/95] Opening the Trunk Manually

[FV32600(ALL)02/95] To open the trunk from the outside, turn the keyto the right until the trunk opens.

[FV32900(ALL)11/94] Remove the key before you close and lock thelid. Shut the trunk lid completely.

[FV33100(ALL)04/95] Using the Remote Control for the Trunk

[FV33200(ALL)04/95] Press the remote release on the instrument panelto the left of the steering wheel to open thetrunk.


159

[FV33300(ALL)11/94]


The remote control for the trunk

[FV36200(ALL)05/94] Special Features of Your Wagon% [FV36300(ALL)02/95] Liftgate

[FV36400(ALL)01/89] Your wagon has a two-way liftgate that lets youeither open the entire liftgate or just thewindow.

[FV36450(ALL)02/95] To open the liftgate, press the release that ishidden under the exterior trim panel just abovethe license plate. Pull up on the handle to raisethe liftgate.

[FV36500(ALL)02/95] The liftgate will not lock automatically whenyou close it. To lock the liftgate with the key,turn left. You can also use the central powerlock on the driver’s door or the LOCK button onthe remote entry keyfob, if your vehicle is soequipped.

[FV36550(ALL)02/95] When the liftgate is locked, the window will alsolock.

[FV36600(ALL)02/95] To open the window, make sure the liftgate andwindow are unlocked, then press the outsidelock cylinder. You can only open the windowfrom outside.

[FV36700(ALL)01/89] To prevent any damage, close the liftgate andwindow before you drive.


160

[FV36800(ALL)04/95]

half page art:0000437-F

The liftgate


If you drive with the liftgate windowopen, you will draw dangerous exhaustfumes into your vehicle. If you must drivelike this, keep the vents open so outsideair comes into the vehicle.

% [FV37200(ALL)11/94] The Storage Area

[FV37300(ALL)10/90] Loading the vehicle

[FV37400(ALL)10/90] When you load the back of your vehicle, put theload as far forward in the compartment aspossible. This will help distribute the weightmore evenly between the front and rear axles.


161

% [FV37700(ALL)02/95] Storage compartments

[FV37800(ALL)02/95] Your wagon comes with a storage compartmentin the floor of the cargo area. An additionalstorage compartment is in the rear trim panel onthe right.

[FV38000(ALL)04/95]

half page art:0001409-C

The locking storage compartment in the rear of the wagon

% [FV38150(ALL)04/95] Cargo Net (If equipped)

[FV38200(ALL)02/95] The cargo net secures lightweight objects in thecargo area of your vehicle. The net attaches toanchors that are already in your trunk. Use allavailable anchors to restrain the objects or theywill not be secured.


162

[FV38300(ALL)05/91]


The cargo net for the wagon

[FV38400(ALL)04/95] Do not put more than 50 pounds (22 kg) in thenet. Any ropes or cords that you use must be asstrong as the cargo net or strong enough torestrain a 50-pound (22 kg) object.

[FV38450(ALL)04/95] This net is not designed to retain objects duringan accident.

% [FV38500(ALL)11/94] Cargo Cover (If equipped)

[FV38600(ALL)01/89] You can conceal luggage or cargo in the back ofyour wagon with the cargo cover.

[FV38700(ALL)01/89] To cover the back compartment:

[FV38800(ALL)02/95] 1. Fasten the cover into the molded pockets inthe trim panel. Make sure the cover is rightside up, so it unrolls from the top.

[FV38900(ALL)04/95] 2. Pull the end of the cover toward you andhook it into the rear molded pockets in theside trim panels in the rear, inserting theright side first.


163

[FV39000(ALL)04/95]


The cargo cover

% [FV39200(ALL)11/94] Luggage Rack

[FV39300(ALL)02/95] You can move the rear luggage crossbar on topof the vehicle to fit the item you need to carry.The front crossbar does not move.

[FV39400(ALL)10/90] To adjust the luggage rack:

[FV39500(ALL)02/95] 1. Load your luggage close to the frontcrossbar. Do not carry more than 100 pounds(45 kg) or cause the vehicle to exceed thegross vehicle weight rating (GVWR), whichis shown on the Safety ComplianceCertification Label.

[FV39600(ALL)02/95] 2. Loosen the adjusting levers on the rearcrossbar by pushing them toward the centerof the vehicle.

[FV39700(ALL)10/90] 3. Slide the rear crossbar forward to hold yourluggage securely in place.

[FV39800(ALL)02/95] 4. Clamp the adjusting levers again by pullingthem toward the outside of the vehicle.

[FV39825(ALL)00/95] Make sure that the rear crossbar pins are lockedin slots by pulling forward and back on each ofthe outside supports. If the crossbar slides, pushor pull until you hear it click and feel it lockinto position.


164

[FV39850(ALL)02/95] 5. Secure luggage or cargo with rope (up to3/8"), NOT ELASTIC CORD, using the tiedown loops provided. There are three loopson each outside rail and one at each end ofthe cross bars.

[FV39875(ALL)02/95]


The adjusting levers for the luggage rack

[FV39900(ALL)11/94] Leave the rear crossbar in its original backposition when you are not using it to holdluggage to reduce aerodynamic drag andimprove fuel economy.

% [FV40000(ALL)11/94] The Second Seats

[FV40100(ALL)11/94] Your vehicle is equipped with split-foldingsecond seats. One or both second seatbacks canbe folded down to provide additional cargospace.

[FV40200(ALL)02/95] To lower the seatback:

[FV40300(ALL)02/95] 1. Lift the seatback release handle on the upperoutboard corner of the seatback.

[FV40400(ALL)02/95] 2. Fold the seatback forward until it rests onthe cushion.


165

[FV40500(ALL)05/95] To raise the seatback:

[FV40700(ALL)02/95] 1. Lift the seatback rearward until it is in theupright position. Push the center of the seatuntil you hear it latch.

[FV40750(ALL)05/95] 2. Make sure the seatback is locked in positionby pushing forward and backward on it.


Securely latch the seatback in the uprightposition to prevent the seatback or objectsfrom being thrown forward during asudden stop or collision.

[FV40800(ALL)11/94] The Third Seat

[FV40900(ALL)04/95] The third seat faces the back of the wagon. Forheight and weight limits, see the label on theseat cushion. When the seat is down, the backpart of your wagon has a flat surface forcarrying cargo.

[FV41000(ALL)03/92] To open up the seat:

[FV41100(ALL)04/95] 1. Unlock the floor panel with the key.

[FV41200(ALL)11/94] 2. Use the handle to fold the floor paneltoward the front of the car.


166

[FV41250(ALL)04/95]


Opening the third seat in the rear of the wagon

[FV41270(ALL)04/95]


The third seat in a wagon


167

[FV41350(ALL)04/95] 3. Remove the cargo cover. The cargo covermust be removed or the seatback cannot belocked in the upright position.

[FV41450(ALL)11/94] 4. Lift the remote latch release on the left sideof the well and fold the remaining floorpanel toward the front of the car until itlatches. Make sure the seatback is locked inthe upright position by pushing forward andbackward on it.

[FV41500(ALL)03/92] To close the seat:

[FV41600(ALL)02/95] 1. Ensure that the third row safety belts arefully stowed, and belts located in notches.

[FV41700(ALL)11/94] 2. Lift the remote latch release and push theseat down until it latches.

[FV41800(ALL)04/95] 3. Pull up on the handle and push the floorpanel into place.


Be sure to keep the floor panel closed andlocked at all times. Unattended childrencould possibly become trapped inside orloose items could be thrown around.


169

Electron

icS

oun

dS

ystems

%[AS10350(ALL)10/95]

fullpageart:0001446-B

Stereo

Rad

io

File:09fcast.exU

pdate:M

on Jan 22 15:58:04 1996

170

[AS10401(ALL)10/95]


Stereo

Rad

iow

ithC

assette

File:09fcast.exU

pdate:M

on Jan 22 15:58:04 1996

171

[AS10550(ALL)10/95]


Stereo

Cassette

with

CD

-DJ

File:09fcast.exU

pdate:M

on Jan 22 15:58:04 1996

172

% [AS10600(ALL)04/95] Stereo and Stereo Cassette Radios

*[AS10650(ALL)08/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio

*[AS10700(ALL)10/95] How to turn the radio on and off

[AS10750(ALL)04/95] Press the “VOL PUSH ON” button to turn theradio on. Press again to turn off.

*[AS10800(ALL)10/95] How to adjust the volume

[AS10825(ALL)02/95] Turn the “VOL PUSH ON” knob to the right toincrease the volume and to the left to decreasethe volume. Dots illuminate in the display toshow relative volume level.

[AS10840(ALL)09/95] NOTE: If the volume is set above a certainlevel when the ignition is turned off,the volume will come back to a“nominal” listening level when theignition is turned back on. However, ifthe radio power is turned off with the“VOL PUSH ON” button, the volumewill not change and will remain at thelevel set when the radio is turned backon.

*[AS11000(ALL)10/95] Selecting the AM or FM frequency band

[AS11125(ALL)04/95] Press the “AM” or “FM” button to select thedesired frequency band or to stop/store cassettetape (when a cassette is playing). Pressing the“FM” button more than once will alternatebetween FM1 and FM2. These functions are usedwith the station memory buttons describedunder How to tune radio stations.

File:09fcast.exUpdate:Mon Jan 22 15:58:04 1996

173

%*[AS11200(ALL)10/95] How to tune radio stations

[AS11300(ALL)04/95] There are four ways for you to tune in aparticular station. You can manually locate thestation using the “TUNE” button, “SEEK” to thestation, “SCAN” to the station or select thestation by using the memory buttons. These fourmethods are described below.

*[AS11400(ALL)09/95] ❑Using the “TUNE” function

[AS11525(ALL)02/95] You can change the frequency up or downone increment at a time by pressing andreleasing either the right (a) or left (b) sideof the “TUNE” or “TUNE/DISC” button. Tochange frequencies quickly, press and holddown either the right or left side of thebutton.

*[AS11700(ALL)10/95] ❑Using the “SEEK” function

*[AS11825(ALL)01/95] Press the right (a) side of the “SEEK”button to select the next listenable station upthe frequency band. Press the left (b) side ofthe button to select the next listenable stationdown the frequency band. By pressing andholding the button, listenable stations can bepassed over to reach the desired station.

*[AS12200(ALL)01/95] ❑Using the “SCAN” function

[AS12325(ALL)05/95] Pressing the “SCAN” button will begin thescan mode up the frequency band, stoppingon each listenable station for approximatelyfive seconds. The band indicator (AM, FM1,FM2) flashes during scan operation.

*[AS12340(ALL)02/95] To stop the scan mode on the presentlysampled station, press the “SCAN” buttonagain.


174

*[AS12700(ALL)10/95] ❑Setting the Station Memory Preset buttons

*[AS12850(ALL)10/95] Your radio is equipped with 6 stationmemory buttons. These buttons can be usedto select up to 6 preset AM stations and 12FM stations (6 in FM1 and 6 in FM2).

[AS12900(ALL)02/95] Follow the steps below to set these buttons tothe desired frequencies:

*[AS13025(ALL)10/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency.

*[AS13200(ALL)10/95] 2. Press one of the memory preset buttons andhold the button until the sound returns. Thatstation is now held in memory on thatbutton.

*[AS13300(ALL)10/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each stationmemory preset button you want to set.

[AS13510(ALL)04/95] ❑Using the Radio Set feature

[AS13515(ALL)04/95] With Radio set, you can automatically setstrong stations into your memory buttons.AM, FM1 and FM2 will be set sequentially.

[AS13545(ALL)04/95] Turn the radio off with the “VOL PUSH ON”knob. Press and hold the “SCAN” button andturn the radio on by pressing the “VOLPUSH ON” knob. Continue holding the“SCAN” button until “RAD” is shown in thedisplay.

[AS13550(ALL)09/95] NOTE: If there are less than six strong stationsin the frequency band, the remainingunfilled buttons will store the laststrong station detected on the band.

*[AS13560(ALL)10/95] After all stations have been filled, the radiowill begin playing the station stored onmemory button 1.


175

*[AS13600(ALL)10/95] Adjusting the tone balance and speakeroutput of your radio

*[AS13800(ALL)10/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing bass response

[AS13925(ALL)04/95] Press the right (a) side of the “BASS” buttonto increase bass (more “lows”); press the left(b) side of the “BASS” button to decreasebass (less “lows”).

*[AS14000(ALL)10/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing treble response

[AS14125(ALL)04/95] Press the right (a) side of the “TREB”button to increase treble (more “highs”);press the left (b) side of the “TREB” buttonto decrease treble (less “highs”).

*[AS14400(ALL)10/95] ❑Adjusting speaker balance

[AS14525(ALL)04/95] Balance control allows you to adjust thesound distribution between the right and leftspeakers. Press the right (a) side of the“BAL” button to shift the sound to the rightspeakers, and press the left (b) side to shiftthe sound to the left speakers. The displaywill show “BAL” and a dot indicating thebalance position.

*[AS14600(ALL)10/95] ❑Adjusting speaker fader

[AS14725(ALL)04/95] Fade control allows you to adjust the sounddistribution between the front and rearspeakers. Press the right (a) side of the“FADE” button to shift the sound to the frontspeakers, and press the left (b) side to shiftthe sound to the rear speakers. The displaywill show “FADE” and a dot indicating thefade position.


176

[AS14800(ALL)04/95] Using the Power Antenna (If equipped)

*[AS14850(ALL)02/95] The power antenna will automatically rise whenyour radio is turned on and the ignition is in theON or ACC position. It will lower when eitherthe radio or the ignition is turned off.

*[AS14900(ALL)02/95] Power antenna maintenance and care

*[AS14950(ALL)02/95] ❑Never drive your vehicle through a car washwith the power antenna mast extended. Thiscan cause damage to the antenna mast, whichis not covered under warranty. Turn off yourradio and/or the vehicle. This willautomatically retract the antenna.

*[AS15000(ALL)02/95] ❑ If your power antenna mast ever becomesdamaged, the mast may not extend or retractproperly which might limit receptionperformance. In this case, it is not necessaryto replace the entire power antenna assembly.A replacement mast can be obtained fromyour dealership for a nominal fee.

*[AS15050(ALL)02/95] ❑Occasionally, the power antenna mast shouldbe wiped clean with mild soap and water ordenatured alcohol. This prevents debris fromaccumulating on the mast which can causeexcessive wear and decrease the powerantenna life. Never use petroleum-basedproducts to clean your antenna mast.


177

%*[AS15100(ALL)08/95] Common Radio Reception Conditions

*[AS15150(ALL)08/95] Several conditions prevent FM reception frombeing completely clear and noise-free, such asthe following:

*[AS15200(ALL)08/95] 1. Distance/Strength

*[AS15250(ALL)08/95] The strength of the FM signal is directly relatedto the distance the signal must travel. Thelistenable range of an average FM signal isapproximately 25 miles (40 kilometers). Beyondthis distance, the radio is operating in a fringearea and the signal becomes weaker.

*[AS15300(ALL)08/95] 2. Terrain

*[AS15350(ALL)08/95] The terrain (hilly, mountainous, tall buildings) ofthe area over which the signal travels mayprevent the FM signal from being noise-free.

*[AS15400(ALL)04/95] 3. Rounded off frequencies

*[AS15450(ALL)08/95] Some FM radio stations advertise a“rounded-off” frequency which is not thefrequency they actually broadcast on. Forexample, a radio station that is assigned afrequency of 98.7 MHz may call itself “Radio 99”even though 99.0 MHz is not an allowable FMbroadcast frequency.

%*[AS15600(ALL)08/95] Using the Controls of Your Cassette TapePlayer

[AS15700(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Radio power must be on to use thecassette tape player.

[AS15800(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Adjust the volume, treble, bass, balanceand fade controls in the same manneras for radio stations.


178

*[AS15900(ALL)08/95] How to insert a tape

[AS16025(ALL)12/95] Your cassette player is equipped with powerloading. Once you insert a tape and pushslightly (with the open edge to the right), theloading mechanism draws the tape the rest ofthe way in and play will begin after amomentary tape tightening process. Displayindicates “TAPE” while tape is playing. If the“TAPE” button is pressed when the cassette tapeplayer is empty, “NO” and “TAPE” will flash inthe display and radio play will continue.

[AS16050(ALL)09/95] NOTE: A cassette tape can be loaded with theignition on whether the radio is on oroff. However, if the radio is off, thecassette tape will be loaded and stored.

[AS16300(ALL)12/95] How to locate a desired selection on thetape

*[AS16350(ALL)08/95] There are four ways to quickly locate a desiredselection on the tape. You can use the fastforward, rewind, “SEEK” or “SCAN” function.Following are brief descriptions of each.

*[AS16400(ALL)09/95] ❑Fast forwarding the tape

[AS16525(ALL)04/95] To fast forward the tape, press the “FF”button. The radio will automatically beginplaying until fast forward is manuallystopped (by pressing the “TAPE”, “EJ”,“REW” or “FF” button) or the end of thetape is reached. The display will show aflashing X to indicate fast forward.

*[AS16535(ALL)01/95] At the end of the tape, the directionautomatically reverses and plays the otherside of the tape.


179

*[AS16600(ALL)08/95] ❑Rewinding the tape

[AS16725(ALL)04/95] To rewind the tape, press the “REW” button.The radio will automatically begin playinguntil rewind is manually stopped (bypressing the “TAPE”, “EJ”, “REW” or “FF”button) or the beginning of the tape isreached. The display will show a flashing Xto indicate rewind.

*[AS17000(ALL)08/95] ❑Using the “SEEK” function with your cassettetape player

[AS17125(ALL)04/95] While in the tape mode, press the right (a)side of the “SEEK” button to seek forward tothe next selection on the tape (displayindicates “SEEK”). Press the left (b) side toseek the previous tape selection.

*[AS17135(ALL)09/95] NOTE: If you want to restart a currentlyplaying tape selection, press the left(b) side of the “SEEK” button afterapproximately three seconds into thecurrent selection.

*[AS17200(ALL)08/95] ❑Using the “SCAN” function with yourcassette tape player

[AS17325(ALL)02/95] Press the “SCAN” button to begin theforward scan mode on the tape currentlyplaying, stopping on each tape selection forapproximately an eight-second sampling(display flashes “SCAN”).

[AS17345(ALL)04/95] To stop the scan mode on the presentlysampled tape selection press “SCAN” asecond time.

[AS17348(ALL)02/95] How to change the side of the tape beingplayed

[AS17350(ALL)02/95] The alternate side of the tape can be selected atany time by pressing the “SIDE 1-2” button.


180

*[AS17400(ALL)08/95] How to eject the tape

[AS17525(ALL)04/95] To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the“EJ” button. The radio will resume playing if thepower is on. The tape cartridge can be ejectedwith radio power (and/or ignition) on or off.

*[AS17550(ALL)08/95] How to store the tape

[AS17575(ALL)04/95] Press the “AM” or “FM” button (or “CD”, ifequipped) to stop the tape player and resumeradio play (or CD-DJ).

*[AS17600(ALL)08/95] Using the DolbyH B noise reduction feature

*[AS17700(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Noise reduction system manufacturedunder license from Dolby LabsLicensing Corporation. “Dolby” anddouble-D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation.

*[AS17825(ALL)04/95] Push the k button to activate Dolby B NoiseReduction. Push again to deactivate.

*[AS18260(ALL)08/95] Tape error messages

*[AS18280(ALL)08/95] Your cassette tape player is equipped todiagnose certain problems you may experience.Error codes are as follows:

[AS18325(ALL)04/95] TD E1 — Possible problem tape cartridge. Thecassette player will automatically eject the tape.Insert the tape again. If the same error codeappears in the display, try a different tape. If theproblem persists, refer the problem to qualifiedpersonnel for service.

[AS18330(ALL)04/95] TD E2 — Radio cannot eject tape. If tape is notejected when the “EJ” button is pressed, referthe problem to qualified personnel for service.


181

[AS18350(ALL)12/95] TD E3 — Radio cannot insert tape properly. Thecassette player will automatically eject the tape.Insert tape again. If the same error code appearsin the display, try a different tape. If theproblem persists, refer the problem to qualifiedpersonnel for service.

*[AS18500(ALL)08/95] Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player andTapes

*[AS18600(ALL)08/95] In order to keep your cassette tape playerperforming the way it was meant to, read andfollow these simple precautions:

*[AS18700(ALL)08/95] ❑Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge toclean the tape player head after 10-12 hoursof play will help maintain the best playbacksound and proper tape operation.

*[AS18800(ALL)08/95] ❑Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long orless should be used. Tapes longer than 90minutes are thinner and subject to breakageor may jam the tape player mechanism.

*[AS18900(ALL)08/95] ❑Protect cassettes from exposure to directsunlight, high humidity and extreme heat orcold. If they are exposed to extremeconditions, allow them to reach a moderatetemperature before playing.

*[AS19000(ALL)08/95] ❑ If a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten itbefore playing by putting your finger or apencil into one of the holes and turning thehub until the tape is tight.

*[AS19100(ALL)08/95] ❑Loose labels on cassette tapes can becomelodged in the mechanism. Remove any looselabel material before inserting cassette.

*[AS19200(ALL)08/95] ❑Do not leave a tape in the cassette tapeplayer. High heat in the vehicle can cause thecassette to warp.


182

%*[AS29351(ALL)02/95] Ford 6-CD Changer[AS29401(ALL)04/95] The Ford 6-CD Changer is in the left of the

trunk or the right of the cargo area. It iscontrolled by the audio system buttons.

*[AS29450(ALL)02/95] Loading Instructions

[AS29500(ALL)04/95] 1. Open the cover door. Open Compact DiscChanger trunk unit by sliding door to thefront (sedan) or rear (wagon) (Figure 1).

[AS29550(ALL)04/95]


Figure 1

[AS29601(ALL)02/95] 2. Press the orange Eject button to eject the disc“magazine” (holds 6 discs) (Figure 2).

[AS29650(ALL)04/95]


Figure 2


183

[AS29701(ALL)02/95] 3. Load discs into the disc magazine slots(numbered 1 through 6 on the window) oneat a time with labeled surfaces upward,starting with bottom slot number 1(Figure 3).

[AS29750(ALL)10/95]


Figure 3

[AS29775(ALL)04/95] To remove a compact disc from the discmagazine, slide the corresponding lever onthe opposite side of the magazine window.The disc will partially eject.

[AS29800(ALL)02/95] 4. Insert loaded disc magazine into changerunit with the arrow on top of the discmagazine pointing toward the changer(Figure 4). Make sure magazine is fullyinserted into changer.

[AS29850(ALL)04/95]


Figure 4

[AS29950(ALL)02/95] 5. Close unit by sliding changer panel door tothe rear (sedan) or front (wagon).


184

[AS30001(ALL)02/95] The Compact Disc Changer unit is now ready toplay using the controls of your audio system.

*[AS30050(ALL)02/95] How to Operate the Ford 6-CD ChangerUsing the Controls on the Radio

[AS30101(ALL)02/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the Ford 6-CDChanger System, you can operate it through thecontrols of your audio system.

*[AS30150(ALL)05/95] Several of the controls on the radio operate inthe same manner in CD mode as they do inradio or cassette mode: turning the power on,volume control and adjusting the bass, treble,speaker balance or fade.

*[AS30201(ALL)02/95] How to begin CD Changer play

*[AS30250(ALL)02/95] NOTE: Radio power must be on to operate theCompact Disc Changer.

[AS30301(ALL)04/95] Push the “CD” button to begin CD play. If thedisc magazine has just been installed, the CDChanger will automatically begin playing thefirst track (selection) of the first disc loaded inthe unit. After that, the CD Changer will starton the disc and track where it was stopped. Thedisplay will indicate “CD-##” for disc number,then display “TR-##” for track number, then“DD-TT” for disc number and track number.

[AS30325(ALL)04/95] If the CD Changer is empty, “NO” and “CD”will flash in the display and radio play willcontinue.

*[AS30350(ALL)02/95] How to change the disc being played

[AS30401(ALL)02/95] When in the CD mode, you can change discs bypressing the right (a) side of the “TUNE/DISC”button (to select the next disc) or the left (b)side of the “TUNE/DISC” button (to select theprevious disc). Play will begin on the first trackof the selected disc.


185

*[AS30450(ALL)02/95] When either side of the button is pressed andheld, the CD changer will continuefast-forwarding or reversing through the discs inthe disc magazine. During these functions, thedisplay will indicate the disc number.

*[AS30501(ALL)10/95] How to change the track being played

*[AS30550(ALL)02/95] Press the right (a) side of the “SEEK” button toseek forward to the next track of current disc.After the last track has been completed, the CDplayer automatically wraps back to the first trackof the current disc.

*[AS30601(ALL)02/95] Press the left (b) side of the SEEK button toseek in reverse to the previous track on thecurrent disc. If a selection has been playing forthree seconds or more and you press the left(b) side of the SEEK button, the CD Changerwill replay that selection from the beginning.

[AS30625(ALL)04/95] Using fast forward or reverse

[AS30651(ALL)04/95] To quickly search for a particular point in aselection, press and hold the “FF” or “REW”button. Find the desired point by watching theelapsed playing time in the display or listeningto the sound, then release the button.

*[AS30800(ALL)02/95] Operating the Shuffle feature

*[AS30851(ALL)02/95] The shuffle feature on your CD player allowsyou to listen to your disc selections in a differentorder. When this feature is activated, your CDplayer will randomly select and play tracks onthe disc.

[AS30900(ALL)02/95] Press the “SHUFFLE” button to turn on, press itagain to turn off. When on, the display willindicate “SHUF” then the disc and track number(dd-tt).


186

*[AS30951(ALL)02/95] Operating the “SCAN” function

*[AS31000(ALL)02/95] Press the “SCAN” button to enter the scanmode. The CD player will begin scanning thedisc, stopping on each listenable track forapproximately an eight second sampling. Thiscontinues until you press the “SCAN” button asecond time.

*[AS31051(ALL)02/95] Operating the Shuffle and Scan featuressimultaneously

*[AS31101(ALL)02/95] Both the shuffle and scan features can beactivated simultaneously. In this mode, theplayer will randomly pick a selection and playthe first eight seconds. This process is continueduntil either the “SCAN” button or “SHUFFLE”button is pressed a second time.

*[AS31110(ALL)04/95] Operating the CD Compression feature

*[AS31120(ALL)04/95] The compression feature will bring soft and loudpassages closer together for a more consistentlistening level.

[AS31130(ALL)04/95] To turn the compression on, press the “COMP”button. When the compression feature isactivated, the display will indicate “C”. Pressagain to deactivate.

*[AS31150(ALL)02/95] How to stop CD play

[AS31200(ALL)04/95] While in CD Changer mode, press the “AM” or“FM” button to stop CD play and resume radioplay. Loading a cassette into the cassette deck(or pressing “TAPE” if a cassette is alreadyloaded) will stop CD play and begin cassetteplay.


187

%*[AS32310(ALL)08/95] How To Take Care of and Clean Your CDPlayer and Discs

*[AS32312(ALL)08/95] To ensure the continued performance of yourFord Compact Disc Player, carefully read thefollowing precautions:

*[AS32314(ALL)08/95] ❑Always handle the disc by its edge. Nevertouch the playing surface.

*[AS32316(ALL)08/95] ❑Before playing, inspect the disc for anycontamination. If needed, clean the disc withan approved disc cleaner, such as theDiscwasherH Compact Disc Cleaner or theAllsop 3H Compact Disc Cleaner, by wipingfrom the center out to the edges. Do not usea circular motion to clean.

*[AS32318(ALL)08/95] ❑Do not clean discs with solvents such asbenzine, thinner, commercially availablecleaners or antistatic spray intended foranalog records.

*[AS32320(ALL)08/95] ❑Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight orheat sources such as defroster and floorheating ducts. Do not leave any discs in aparked car in direct sunlight where there maybe a considerable rise in temperature ordamage may result.

*[AS32322(ALL)08/95] ❑After playing, store the disc in its case.

*[AS32324(ALL)08/95] ❑ If a disc has already been inserted, do not tryto insert another disc. Doing so may damagethe disc player.

*[AS32326(ALL)08/95] ❑Do not insert anything other than a disc intothe disc player.


188

*[AS32328(ALL)08/95] CAUTION: The use of optical instruments withthis product will increase eye hazard as the laserbeam used in this compact disc player isharmful to the eyes. Do not attempt todisassemble the case. Refer servicing to qualifiedpersonnel only.

*[AS32330(ALL)08/95] Common Operating Conditions of YourCD Player

*[AS32332(ALL)08/95] The following information is designed to helpyou recognize typical situations that could bemistakenly interpreted as mechanicalmalfunctions of the disc player.

*[AS32336(ALL)08/95] ❑The disc is inserted with the label surfacedownward.

*[AS32338(ALL)08/95] ❑The disc is dusty or defective.

*[AS32340(ALL)08/95] ❑The player’s internal temperature is above140˚F (60˚C). Allow the player to cool offbefore operating.

*[AS32342(ALL)08/95] ❑Different manufacturers of compact discs mayproduce discs with different dimensions ortolerances, some of which may not be withinindustry standards or in accordance with theCD format. Because of this, a new disc that isfree of dust and scratches could be defectiveand may not play on your Ford CompactDisc Player.

*[AS32344(ALL)09/95] If play does not begin after the CD button ispushed:

*[AS32345(ALL)08/95] ❑The radio is not on.

[AS32346(ALL)02/95] ❑The disc magazine is not fully seated inchanger.

*[AS32348(ALL)08/95] ❑Moisture may have condensed on the lenseswithin the unit. If this occurs, remove thedisc and wait approximately an hour until themoisture evaporates.


189

*[AS32350(ALL)08/95] If the sound skips:

*[AS32352(ALL)08/95] ❑Badly scratched discs or extremely roughroads will cause the sound to skip. Skippingwill not damage the disc player or scratch thediscs.

*[AS32400(ALL)02/95] CD Error Messages

[AS32500(ALL)02/95] Your system is equipped to diagnose certainproblems you may experience. The displayederror codes are:

[AS32600(ALL)02/95] NO then CD — Empty slot or magazine,mechanical error, disc(s) unreadable, ormechanism focus error. Check all discs in themagazine for scratches and proper insertion. Ifproblem persists, refer problem to qualifiedpersonnel for service.

[AS32700(ALL)02/95] NO then DJ — CD Changer not connected ornot communicating to audio system. Referproblem to qualified personnel for service.

[AS32800(ALL)04/95] TOO then HOT — The changer’s internaltemperature is above 140˚F (60˚C). Allow theplayer to cool before operating.


190

%*[AS37000(ALL)08/95] Important Warranty and ServiceInformation

*[AS37050(ALL)07/90] ❑Warranty

*[AS37100(ALL)08/95] Your sound system is warranted for three yearsor 36,000 miles (60,000 kilometers), whichevercomes first. Consult your vehicle warrantybooklet for further information. Ask your dealerfor a copy of this limited warranty.

*[AS37150(ALL)07/90] ❑Service

*[AS37200(ALL)08/95] At Ford Electronics, we stand behind our audiosystems with a comprehensive service and repairprogram. If anything should go wrong withyour Ford audio system, return to your dealerfor service. There is a nationwide network ofqualified Ford authorized repair centers to assistyou.


191

Driving Your Taurus

*[DR00300(ALL)07/95] Your vehicle will have one of the followingtypes of transaxles:

*[DR00500(ALL)11/94] ❑an automatic overdrive transaxle, or

[DR00510(ALL)02/95] ❑an automatic overdrive transaxle withOverdrive Off (O/D OFF) switch

*[DR00700(ALL)11/94] If you are not sure which transaxle your vehiclehas, talk to your dealer.

*[DR00800(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is equipped with an ElectronicPowertrain Control Module that limits engineand/or vehicle speeds with a cut-out mode topromote durability.

% [DR03510(ALL)04/95] Driving with an AutomaticOverdrive Transaxle (ColumnGearshift without O/D OFFSwitch)

%*[DR03600(ALL)04/95] Your automatic overdrive transaxle providesfully automatic operation in either j(Overdrive) or D (Drive). Driving with the shiftselector in j (Overdrive) gives the best fueleconomy for normal driving conditions. Formanual control, start in 1 (First) and then shiftmanually.

File:10fcdrt.exUpdate:Mon Jan 22 15:59:33 1996

192

%*[DR03800(ALL)01/95] Putting Your Vehicle in Gear

*[DR04001(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Hold the brake pedal down while youmove the gearshift lever from position toposition. If you do not hold the brakepedal down, your vehicle may moveunexpectedly and injure someone.

*[DR04050(ALL)03/95] To operate:

*[DR04101(ALL)01/95] 1. Start the engine.

*[DR04150(ALL)01/95] 2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

*[DR04201(ALL)01/95] 3. Move the gearshift lever out of P (Park).

%*[DR04250(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a Brake ShiftInterlock safety feature. This feature prevents thegearshift from being moved from the P (Park)position until the brake pedal is depressed. Thisfeature is active when the ignition is in the ONposition. If the gearshift lever CANNOT bemoved from P (Park) with the brake pedaldepressed:

*[DR04300(ALL)01/95] 1. Turn the engine off and remove the ignitionkey.

[DR04350(ALL)11/94] 2. Reinsert the ignition key and turn clockwiseto the first position (OFF).

[DR04400(ALL)11/94] 3. Depress the brake pedal, move the gearshiftlever to N (Neutral) and start the engine.

*[DR04425(ALL)07/95] If you need to shift out of P (Park) by using thealternate procedure described above, it ispossible that a fuse has blown and that yourbrakelamps may also not be functional. Pleaserefer to the chapter titled Servicing Your Taurusin this Owner Guide for instructions on checkingand replacing fuses.


193


DO NOT DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE UNTILYOU VERIFY THAT THE BRAKELAMPSARE WORKING.

%*[DR04501(ALL)11/94] Using a column-mounted gearshift

*[DR04550(ALL)04/95] If your gearshift is on the column, you can useany of the following positions:

[DR04601(ALL)11/94]


The column-mounted gearshift

*[DR04650(ALL)01/95] Once you place the gearshift securely intoposition, gradually release the brake pedal anduse the accelerator as necessary.

%*[DR05100(ALL)01/95] R (Reverse)

*[DR05200(ALL)08/95] With the gearshift in the R (Reverse) position,the vehicle will move backward. You shouldalways come to a complete stop before shiftinginto or out of R (Reverse).

*[DR05250(ALL)01/95] N (Neutral)

*[DR05275(ALL)01/95] With the gearshift in the N (Neutral) position,the vehicle can be started and is free to roll.Hold the brake pedal down while in thisposition.


194

%*[DR05300(ALL)01/95] Driving

%*[DR05400(ALL)04/95] When to use j (Overdrive)

*[DR05500(ALL)04/95] j (Overdrive) is the usual driving position foran automatic overdrive transaxle. It works thesame way D (Drive) works, automaticallyupshifting or downshifting as the vehicle speedsor slows.

*[DR05600(ALL)04/95] However, j (Overdrive) also shifts into a fourthgear — an overdrive gear — when your vehiclecruises at a consistent speed for any length oftime. This fourth gear will increase your fueleconomy when you travel at cruising speeds.

*[DR05800(ALL)06/95] When to use D (Drive)

[DR06000(ALL)12/95] D (Drive) eliminates the excessive shiftingbetween third and fourth gears that your vehiclesometimes does when you are traveling throughhilly terrain in j (Overdrive). It also providesmore engine braking than j (Overdrive) fordescending hills or city driving.

*[DR06100(ALL)06/95] When to use 1 (First)

*[DR06200(ALL)11/94] Use 1 (First) when added engine braking isdesired when descending steep hills.

*[DR06220(ALL)11/94] The automatic transaxle will shift to the propergear to ascend any grade without any need toshift to 1 (First).

[DR06300(ALL)04/95] Do not go faster than 38 mph (61 km/h) in thisgear. You can upshift from 1 (First) to D (Drive)or from 1 (First) to j (Overdrive) at any speed.

*[DR06400(ALL)01/95] P (Park)

*[DR06500(ALL)11/94] Always come to a complete stop before you shiftinto P (Park). Make sure that the gearshift issecurely latched in P (Park). This locks thetransaxle and prevents the front wheels fromrotating.


195




Never leave your vehicle unattendedwhile it is running.

[DR06700(ALL)11/94] You can tell a column-mounted gearshift issecurely latched in P (Park) if you cannot moveit without pulling it toward you and rotating itdownward.

% [DR06705(ALL)04/95] Driving with an AutomaticOverdrive Transaxle (Column orConsole Gearshift with O/D OFFSwitch)

[DR06710(ALL)02/95] Your automatic overdrive transaxle providesfully automatic operation in either D (Overdrive)or with the O/D OFF Switch depressed. Drivingwith the shift selector in D (Overdrive) gives thebest fuel economy for normal driving conditions.For manual control, start in 1 (First) and thenshift manually.

%*[DR06730(ALL)01/95] Putting Your Vehicle in Gear

[DR06735(ALL)04/95] You must push in the thumb button to move theconsole-mounted gearshift to the position youchoose.

[DR06740(ALL)02/95] To move the gearshift out of P (Park), theignition must be turned from the locked positionto either the OFF or the ON position.


196

*[DR06745(ALL)03/95] To operate:

*[DR06750(ALL)01/95] 1. Start the engine.

*[DR06755(ALL)01/95] 2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

*[DR06760(ALL)01/95] 3. Move the gearshift lever out of P (Park).

%*[DR06765(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a Brake ShiftInterlock safety feature. This feature prevents thegearshift from being moved from the P (Park)position until the brake pedal is depressed. Thisfeature is active when the ignition is in the ONposition. If the gearshift lever CANNOT bemoved from P (Park) with the brake pedaldepressed:

*[DR06770(ALL)01/95] 1. Turn the engine off and remove the ignitionkey.

[DR06775(ALL)11/94] 2. Reinsert the ignition key and turn clockwiseto the first position (OFF).

[DR06780(ALL)11/94] 3. Depress the brake pedal, move the gearshiftlever to N (Neutral) and start the engine.

*[DR06781(ALL)07/95] If you need to shift out of P (Park) by using thealternate procedure described above, it ispossible that a fuse has blown and that yourbrakelamps may also not be functional. Pleaserefer to the chapter titled Servicing Your Taurusin this Owner Guide for instructions on checkingand replacing fuses.


DO NOT DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE UNTILYOU VERIFY THAT THE BRAKELAMPSARE WORKING.


197

[DR06785(ALL)04/95] Using the gearshift

*[DR06787(ALL)04/95] If your gearshift is on the column, you can useany of the following positions:

% [DR06788(ALL)04/95]


The column-mounted gearshift


198

[DR06789(ALL)04/95] If your gearshift is on the console, you can useany of the following positions:

% [DR06790(ALL)04/95]


The console-mounted gearshift

*[DR06791(ALL)04/95] The console-mounted gearshift will lock whenyou turn the key to the LOCK position. Whenthe gearshift is in any position except P (Park),the ignition key cannot be turned to LOCK orremoved from the steering column. TOREMOVE THE KEY, the gearshift lever must bein P (Park).

*[DR06793(ALL)11/94] Once the gearshift is secure in the desiredposition, release the brake pedal and use theaccelerator as necessary.

%*[DR06795(ALL)01/95] R (Reverse)

*[DR06800(ALL)08/95] With the gearshift in the R (Reverse) position,the vehicle will move backward. You shouldalways come to a complete stop before shiftinginto or out of R (Reverse).


199

*[DR06802(ALL)01/95] N (Neutral)

*[DR06804(ALL)01/95] With the gearshift in the N (Neutral) position,the vehicle can be started and is free to roll.Hold the brake pedal down while in thisposition.

%*[DR06805(ALL)01/95] Driving

%*[DR06825(ALL)05/95] When to use D (Overdrive)

*[DR06830(ALL)11/94] D (Overdrive) is the usual driving position foran automatic overdrive transaxle. Itautomatically upshifts or downshifts as thevehicle speeds or slows.

*[DR06835(ALL)11/94] However, D (Overdrive) also shifts into a fourthgear — an overdrive gear — when your vehiclecruises at a consistent speed for any length oftime. This fourth gear will increase your fueleconomy when you travel at cruising speeds.

[DR07025(ALL)04/95] When to use D (O/D OFF)

[DR07050(ALL)12/95] You will notice that there is only one driveposition on your gearshift indicator (instead ofDrive and Overdrive). However, you will find aswitch labeled O/D located on the gearshiftlever. Push in the switch and the O/D OFF lightin the instrument cluster will illuminate. Withthe O/D OFF light illuminated, the transaxlewill operate in first, second and third gears andwill not shift into fourth gear. Operating in D(O/D OFF) eliminates the excessive shiftingbetween third and fourth gears that your vehiclesometimes does when you are traveling throughhilly terrain in D (Overdrive). It also providesmore engine braking than D (Overdrive) fordescending hills or city driving.

[DR07075(ALL)04/95] To return the transaxle to the normal Overdriveoperation, press the O/D OFF switch again. Usethis switch to select Overdrive or D (O/D OFF)whenever you drive your vehicle.


200

[DR08050(ALL)09/95] NOTE: If the O/D OFF indicator light isflashing on and off repeatedly whenthe vehicle is started or does not comeon when the O/D OFF switch ispushed, it means that there is atransaxle electronic system malfunction.You should contact your dealer as soonas possible or damage to the transaxlecould occur.

*[DR08075(ALL)10/95] The transaxle will be in the “overdrive on”mode when the vehicle is started even if theO/D OFF mode was selected when the vehiclewas last shut off.

*[DR09025(ALL)01/95] When to use 2 (Second)

[DR09050(ALL)11/94] Use Second for start-up on slippery roads or togive you more engine braking to slow yourvehicle on downgrades.

*[DR09075(ALL)06/95] When to use 1 (First)

*[DR10025(ALL)11/94] Use 1 (First) when added engine braking isdesired when descending steep hills.

*[DR10050(ALL)11/94] The automatic transaxle will shift to the propergear to ascend any grade without any need toshift to 1 (First).

[DR10075(ALL)11/94] Do not go faster than 38 mph (61 km/h) in thisgear. You can upshift from 1 (First) to D(Overdrive) at any speed.

*[DR10125(ALL)01/95] P (Park)

*[DR10150(ALL)11/94] Always come to a complete stop before you shiftinto P (Park). Make sure that the gearshift issecurely latched in P (Park). This locks thetransaxle and prevents the front wheels fromrotating.

[DR10160(ALL)04/95] If your vehicle has a console mounted gearshift,the gearshift indicator in the cluster isilluminated in P (Park) only when the gearshiftbutton is released.


201




Never leave your vehicle unattendedwhile it is running.

[DR10275(ALL)11/94] You can tell a console-mounted gearshift issecurely latched in P (Park) if you cannot moveit without pushing in the thumb button.

%*[DR15600(ALL)01/95] Steering Your Vehicle%*[DR15800(ALL)01/95] Your vehicle comes with power steering. Power

steering uses energy from the engine to helpsteer your vehicle.

[DR15970(ALL)11/94] Your vehicle has variable-assist steering. Thissystem provides light power steering efforts forparking and heavier power steering efforts forhighway driving. If you notice that the powersteering effort does not change according to thespeed you are traveling, or if the power steeringsystem is not working, have the system checked.

%*[DR16100(ALL)04/95] If the amount of effort needed to steer yourvehicle changes at a constant vehicle speed, havethe power steering system checked. If the powersteering system breaks down (or if the engine isturned off), you can steer the vehicle manuallybut it takes more effort.

*[DR16150(ALL)01/95] Never hold the steering wheel to the extremeright or left for more than five seconds if theengine is running. This can damage the powersteering pump.


202

[DR16170( T)10/95] Semi-Active Ride Control(SHO only)

[DR16190( T)12/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a semi-active ridecontrol suspension system. Ride and handling isenhanced by firm shock absorber performanceduring certain road conditions and handlingmaneuvers. The shock absorber is returned to asofter performance when driver or road surfaceinduced motion ceases. This system is automaticwith no direct driver input required.

%*[DR16200(ALL)03/95] Brakes%*[DR16300(ALL)01/95] Applying the Brakes

*[DR16450(ALL)05/95] Your vehicle may have four-wheel poweranti-lock disc brakes which adjust automaticallythrough everyday use.

*[DR16500(ALL)05/95] Some models have power front disc brakes andrear drum brakes which automatically adjust asthe brake pads and linings wear down.

*[DR16700(ALL)05/95] If your vehicle does not have anti-lock brakes,apply the brake pedal gradually. Use the“squeeze” technique — push on the brake pedalwith a steadily increasing force. This allows thewheels to continue to roll while you are slowingdown, which lets you steer properly.

*[DR16800(ALL)05/95] If your vehicle does not have anti-lock brakes,extreme braking can make the wheels lock andslide, causing you to lose control of the steering.If the wheels lock, release the brake pedal andrepeat the “squeeze” technique.

*[DR16900(ALL)05/95] Do not drive with your foot resting on the brakepedal; you will wear out the linings and increaseyour vehicle’s stopping distance. Brake rotordamage may also eventually occur.


203

*[DR17000(ALL)09/95] NOTE: If you are driving down a long orsteep hill, shift to a lower gear and donot apply your brakes continuously. Ifyou apply your brakes continuously,they may overheat and become lesseffective.

%*[DR17100(ALL)10/95] Occasional brake squeal during light to moderatestops does not affect the function of the brakesystem and is normal. However, if the squealbecomes louder or more frequent, have yourbrakes inspected by your dealer or a qualifiedservice technician.

% [DR17350(ALL)02/95] Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)(If equipped)

*[DR17450(ALL)05/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the anti-lockbrake system (ABS), the wheels will not lock andslide when you press down hard on the brakepedal. The ABS automatically starts releasingand reapplying the front brakes independentlyand the rear brakes together whenever yourvehicle’s wheels start to lock. When thishappens, you will feel the brake pedal pulsate.This is an indication that the ABS is workingcorrectly and is normal.

*[DR17500(ALL)05/95] If the brake pedal is applied while the vehicle isdriven over uneven road surfaces, the ABS maycycle and the driver may sense a pulsation inthe brake pedal, accompanied by a slight up anddown movement of the pedal height and aclicking sound. This may also happen whendriving on an inclined surface such as adriveway while making a sharp turn. This is anormal condition.


204

*[DR17600(ALL)05/95] Each time you turn the ignition key to the ONposition, the ABS will function through one testcycle. When this happens, the ABS light willcome on for up to five seconds. If the light stayson longer than five seconds, shut off the engineand restart. If it remains on, it means the ABS isdisabled and should be serviced immediately torestore the benefits of the anti-lock feature.Normal braking is not affected unless the redBRAKE system warning light is also lit.

*[DR17650(ALL)05/95] ABS has self-check capabilities. As describedabove, the system turns on the ABS light eachtime you start your engine. After the engine isstarted and the ABS light turns off, the systemperforms another test the first time the vehiclereaches 4-9 mph (6-15 km/h). The system turnson the ABS pump motor for approximately 1/2second. At this time, a mechanical noise may beheard. This is a normal part of the self-checkfeature. If a malfunction is found during thischeck the ABS light will come on.

[DR17675(ALL)02/95] Vehicles with ABS are identified with a label onthe front door pillar.

*[DR17700(ALL)08/95] Ford Motor Company has not found anynegative effects of mobile radio transmittingequipment installed on vehicles with the ABSsystem providing that the radio is installedaccording to the radio manufacturer’sinstructions. However, if you have had a mobileradio transmitter installed and the ABS lightcomes on (at any time other than immediatelyafter turning the key to the ON position) haveyour mobile radio dealer inspect the radioinstallation. Also, if the ABS system is activatedother than during maximum braking, have yourmobile radio installation checked.


205

%*[DR17800(ALL)03/95] Parking Brake

*[DR17900(ALL)01/95] The parking brake should be used wheneveryou park your vehicle.

[DR18000(ALL)01/95] This brake is suspended just below the bottomof the instrument panel to the left of the brakepedal.

[DR18300(ALL)11/94]


The parking brake and parking brake release




If the parking brake is fully released, butthe Brake System light remains on, havethe brakes checked immediately. Theymay not be working properly.


To prevent personal injury, do not releasethe parking brake while outside thevehicle.


206

*[DR19000(ALL)06/95] The parking brake is not designed to stop amoving vehicle, but you can use the parkingbrake to stop your vehicle in an emergency ifthe normal brakes fail. However, since theparking brake applies only the rear brakes, thestopping distance will increase greatly and thehandling of your vehicle will be adverselyaffected.

*[DR19050(ALL)03/95] Always check the Brake Warning Light eachtime you start your engine. Driving with theparking brake on will cause the brakes to wearout quickly and will reduce the fuel economy.

%*[DR19100(ALL)01/95] Driving Under Special Conditions%*[DR19200(ALL)01/95] Tips for Safe Driving

*[DR19300(ALL)07/95] As with any new vehicle, yours may drive andhandle differently from your previous vehicle.Use care until you become accustomed to itsvarious features and driving characteristics.

*[DR19400(ALL)03/95] Operate your vehicle within reasonable limits.Sudden acceleration, deceleration, turning, orcombinations of these maneuvers can cause avehicle to behave differently than anticipated.

%*[DR19750(ALL)01/95] Driving in Bad Weather

%*[DR19800(ALL)01/95] Slippery roads

*[DR19900(ALL)03/95] On some slippery road surfaces, front-wheeldrive may provide better acceleration thanrear-wheel drive. However, this does not meanthat your vehicle can stop any faster or anybetter than a vehicle with rear-wheel drive.Exercise the same caution while driving onslippery roads with your front-wheel drivevehicle as you would with a rear-wheel drivevehicle.


207

*[DR20100(ALL)03/95] ❑Do not quickly move the steering wheelunless necessary.

*[DR20200(ALL)01/95] ❑Drive slower than you normally would.

*[DR20400(ALL)01/95] ❑Give your vehicle more distance to stop.

*[DR20500(ALL)03/92] ❑Pump the brake pedal steadily and evenly toavoid locking your wheels. (Does not applyto vehicles with anti-lock brakes.)

*[DR20600(ALL)02/93] ❑Consider using one of the lower gears.


To avoid skidding and losing control onslippery roads, do not downshift into 1(First) when you are moving faster than20 mph (30 km/h).


If your vehicle has speed control, do notuse it on slippery roads. You could losecontrol of your vehicle and could injuresomeone.

*[DR20850(ALL)01/95] If your vehicle gets stuck (for example, in mudor snow), you may try to “rock” it out of thespot. Shift, in a steady rhythm, between forwardand reverse gears. While in each gear, presslightly on the accelerator and release.


Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph(55 km/h). The tires may fail and injure apassenger or bystander.


208

*[DR21000(ALL)03/95] By moving the vehicle backward and forward,you may gain enough momentum to move outof the spot. Do not rock the vehicle for morethan a few minutes. This may overheat theengine, damage the transaxle, or damage thetires. If you are still stuck after a minute or twoof rocking, call for a tow truck.

%*[DR21200(ALL)01/95] High water

*[DR21300(ALL)01/95] Do not drive through flooded areas unless youare sure that the water is below the bottom ofthe wheel rims.

*[DR21400(ALL)04/94] If you must drive through high water, driveslowly. You may have limited traction or wetbrakes, so allow extra stopping distance becauseyour vehicle will not stop as quickly as usual.

*[DR21500(ALL)01/95] After you drive through the standing water,apply your brakes gently several times as yourvehicle moves slowly. This helps to dry thebrakes.

%*[DR21600(ALL)03/95] Driving With a Heavy Load

*[DR21700(ALL)01/95] There are limits to the amount of weight yourvehicle can carry or tow. The total weight ofyour vehicle, plus the weight of the passengersand cargo, should never be more than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). Also, the weightthat your vehicle carries over the front axle andrear axle should never be more than the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the respectiveaxle.

%*[DR21800(ALL)01/95] You can find your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWRon the Safety Compliance Certification Label onthe left front door lock facing or on the doorlatch post pillar.


209

*[DR21900(ALL)08/95] The weight limits of your vehicle’s tires affectthe GVWR or GAWR limitations. Usage ofreplacement tires with higher weight limits thanoriginals does not increase GVWR or GAWR.Usage of lower capacity replacement tires maylower GVWR and GAWR limitations.


If the GVWR or the GAWR specified onthe Safety Compliance Certification Labelis exceeded, your vehicle may be damagedor you may lose control and injuresomeone.

%*[DR22005(ALL)01/95] Limiting Your Vehicle’s Load

*[DR22010(ALL)01/95] The load that you add to your vehicle must notexceed the maximum load stated on the SafetyCompliance Certification Decal attached to theleft front door pillar.

*[DR22015(ALL)01/95] To figure the weight of your vehicle’s load, addthe weights of:

*[DR22020(ALL)01/95] ❑ the driver and passengers

*[DR22025(ALL)01/95] ❑ luggage and any other items that you put inyour vehicle

*[DR22030(ALL)01/95] ❑ the tongue load of the loaded trailer

*[DR22035(ALL)01/95] ❑ the weight of any equipment that has beenadded to your vehicle since it was deliveredto your dealer


210

*[DR22040(ALL)01/95] If you do not know the actual weights of theseitems, use the following procedure to figure theweight of a load:

*[DR22045(ALL)01/95] 1. Weigh your vehicle without the driver,passengers and luggage. You might takeyour vehicle to a shipping company or aninspection station for trucks.

*[DR22050(ALL)01/95] 2. Then weigh your vehicle with the driver,passengers and luggage.

*[DR22055(ALL)01/95] 3. Subtract the first reading from the second tofigure the total weight of the load.

*[DR22060(ALL)01/95] After determining this load, you must also makesure that the total weight of your vehicle, plusthe load it carries, is less than its GVWR. Also,make sure that the weight your vehicle carriesover each axle is less than the GAWR for therespective axle.

*[DR22065(ALL)01/95] You can find the GVWR and GAWR on theSafety Compliance Certification Label on the leftfront door lock facing or the door latch postpillar.

*[DR22070(ALL)01/95] If your vehicle exceeds the GVWR, remove cargofrom your vehicle accordingly. If your vehicleexceeds the GAWR for either axle, shift the loador remove cargo accordingly.


211

%*[DR22100(ALL)04/95] Trailer Towing[DR22125(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is classified as a light duty towing

vehicle. The amount of weight that you cansafely tow depends on the type of engine inyour vehicle. See the following charts:

[DR22150(ALL)04/95]

sixteen pica chart:0000489-H

[DR22190(ALL)10/95]

fourteen pica chart:0001436-C


212

*[DR22200(ALL)01/95] Your vehicle does not come from the factoryfully equipped to tow. No towing packages areavailable through Ford or Lincoln/Mercurydealers.

*[DR22300(ALL)01/95] Because towing a trailer puts extra strain onyour vehicle, you must follow certainprecautions for your safety and the good of yourvehicle:

*[DR25800(ALL)11/92] ❑Stay within the load limits when you tow.(See Knowing Your Vehicle’s Load Limits.)

*[DR25900(ALL)01/95] ❑Carefully and thoroughly prepare yourvehicle for towing, making sure to use theright equipment and to attach it properly.(See Preparing to Tow in this chapter.)

*[DR26000(ALL)01/95] ❑Use extra caution when driving your vehiclewhile you tow. (See Driving while you tow inthis chapter.)

*[DR26100(ALL)01/95] ❑Service your vehicle more frequently if youtow a trailer. (See Servicing your vehicle if youtow in this chapter.)

*[DR26150(ALL)05/94] Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has beendriven at least 500 miles (800 km).


213


Towing trailers beyond the maximumrecommended gross trailer weight exceedsthe limits of the vehicle and could resultin engine damage, transaxle/axle damage,structural damage, loss of control, andpersonal injury.


Do not tow a trailer when the temporaryspare tire is being used.

*[DR26600(ALL)01/95] Ten to 15% of the loaded trailer’s weight shouldbe on the tongue. However, the tongue loadshould never exceed 10% of the maximumweight that your vehicle can safely tow.

*[DR28500(ALL)01/95] Preparing to Tow

*[DR28600(ALL)01/95] For your safety and for the good of yourvehicle, use the right equipment for the type oftrailer you tow. Also, make sure that all towingequipment is properly attached to your vehicle.If you are not certain that you are using theright equipment in the proper manner, see yourFord or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.

*[DR28700(ALL)01/95] Do not use hitches that clamp onto yourvehicle’s bumper. The bumper is not designed tobear the load.


214

%*[DR28750(ALL)01/95] Using the hitch

*[DR28800(ALL)05/94] Your vehicle uses a load carrying hitch. Becausethis type of hitch places the tongue load of atrailer on the rear wheels of your vehicle, youmust distribute the load in your trailer so that10 to 15% of the total weight of the trailer is onthe tongue.

*[DR28900(ALL)01/95] Tie down the load so that it does not shift andchange the weight on the hitch. This willprevent damage to your vehicle and make yourvehicle easier to handle.

%*[DR28950(ALL)01/95] Connecting the safety chains

*[DR29000(ALL)01/95] Always attach the trailer’s safety chains to yourvehicle. They help protect your trailer if thehitch breaks.

*[DR29100(ALL)01/95] To connect the trailer’s safety chains:

*[DR29200(ALL)01/95] 1. Cross the chains under the trailer tongueand attach them to your vehicle’s frame orhook retainers. Never attach the safetychains to your vehicle’s bumper. The bumperis not designed to bear the weight of atrailer.

*[DR29300(ALL)01/95] 2. Make sure that you leave enough slack inthe chains to allow you to turn corners.

*[DR29400(ALL)01/95] If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructionsthat the rental agency gives you.


215

%*[DR29450(ALL)01/95] Connecting the trailer’s brakes

*[DR29500(ALL)01/95] Electric brakes and manual, automatic, orsurge-type hydraulic brakes are safe if youinstall them properly and adjust them accordingto the manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure thatyour trailer’s brakes meet local and federalregulations.


Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brakesystem directly to your vehicle’s brakesystem. Your vehicle may not haveenough braking power and your chancesof having a collision greatly increase.

%*[DR29650(ALL)01/95] Connecting the trailer’s lights

*[DR29700(ALL)01/95] Do not connect a trailer’s lighting systemwiring directly to your vehicle’s lighting systemwiring. To get the proper equipment forhooking up your trailer’s lights, see your localtrailer dealer and your Ford dealer. Be sure tofollow their instructions carefully.

*[DR29800(ALL)01/95] If you do not install trailer lights correctly, youmay cause damage to the vehicle’s lightingsystem.


216

%*[DR29900(ALL)01/95] Driving While You Tow

*[DR30000(ALL)05/95] Be especially careful when driving while youtow a trailer. Never drive faster than 45 mph(70 km/h) when you tow in hilly country onhot days. Also, anticipate stops so that you canbrake gradually.

[DR30175(ALL)04/95] When you tow in steep hills, move theautomatic transaxle to 1 (First) (vehicles withoutO/D OFF switch) or 2 (Second) (vehicles withO/D OFF switch) when descending. This willgive more engine braking on downgrades. Theautomatic transaxle will automatically downshiftto the proper gear on upgrades.

[DR30200(ALL)04/95] If you tow in Overdrive while riding throughhilly country, your vehicle may frequently shiftbetween Overdrive and Third gears. To preventyour vehicle from shifting too much, move thegearshift to D (Drive) (column shift withoutO/D OFF switch) or push the O/D OFF switch(column or console shift). This will also givebetter braking going down hills.

%*[DR30300(ALL)01/95] If you use the speed control while you aretowing on very long, steep grades, the speedcontrol may shut off.

% [DR30400(ALL)04/95] Servicing Your Vehicle When You Tow

*[DR30500(ALL)08/93] If you tow a trailer for a long distance, yourvehicle will need to be serviced more frequentlythan usual. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule andRecord booklet for additional information.


217

Roadside Emergencies

%*[RE00310(ALL)03/95] If Your Vehicle Needs aJump-Start

*[RE00320(ALL)08/95] Your vehicle’s battery may die if you leave thelights on or any electrical equipment on afteryou turn the engine off. If this happens, youmay be able to jump-start your vehicle with abooster battery.

*[RE00400(ALL)02/95] RWARNING

The gases around the battery can explodeif exposed to flames, sparks, or litcigarettes. An explosion could result ininjury or vehicle damage.


To protect yourself when charging abattery, always shield your face and eyes.Make sure that you can breathe fresh air.

%*[RE00700(ALL)06/95] RWARNING

Applying too much pressure on the endswhen lifting a battery could cause acid tospill. Lift the battery with a carrier orwith your hands on the opposite corners.

%*[RE00800(ALL)07/95] RWARNING

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burnsskin, eyes, and clothing.

File:12fcret.exUpdate:Mon Jan 22 16:01:15 1996

218

*[RE00850(ALL)07/95] If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, orclothing, immediately flush the area with waterfor at least 15 minutes. If someone swallows theacid, have him or her drink lots of milk or waterfirst, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, orvegetable oil. Call a doctor immediately.

*[RE00900(ALL)03/95] To avoid damaging your vehicle or your battery,and to avoid injury to yourself, follow thesedirections for preparing your vehicle tojump-start and connecting the jumper cables inthe order they are given. If in doubt, call forroad service.

*[RE01000(ALL)03/95] Preparing Your Vehicle

*[RE01100(ALL)03/95] 1. Your vehicle has a 12-volt starting system, soyou need to use a 12-volt jumper system.You will damage your starting motor,ignition system, and other electrical parts ifyou connect them to a 24-volt power supply(either two 12-volt batteries in series or a24-volt generator set).

*[RE01200(ALL)03/95] 2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabledvehicle. You could damage the vehicle’selectrical system.

*[RE01300(ALL)04/95] 3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood ofthe disabled vehicle. Make sure the vehiclesdo not touch each other. Set the parkingbrake on both vehicles and stay clear of theengine cooling fan and other moving parts.

*[RE01400(ALL)03/95] 4. Check all battery terminals and remove anyexcessive corrosion before you attach thejumper cables.

[RE01500(ALL)04/95] 5. Turn on the heater fan in both vehicles. Ifyou have electronic climate control, press theV F-DEF button. Turn off all other switchesand lights.


219

%*[RE01700(ALL)05/95] Connecting the jumper cables

*[RE02500(ALL)03/95] 1. Connect one end of the first jumper cable tothe positive (+) terminal of the dischargedbattery. (You can connect either jumper cableto the positive (+) terminal, as long as youuse the same cable for both positiveterminals.) Most jumper cables have a redcable and a black cable. The red cable isgenerally used for the positive terminals andthe black for the negative ones.

*[RE02600(ALL)04/95] 2. Connect the other end of the first cable tothe positive (+) terminal of the boosterbattery.

*[RE02700(ALL)07/95] 3. Connect one end of the second cable to thenegative (S) terminal of the booster battery— NOT to the discharged battery.

*[RE02800(ALL)04/95] 4. Connect the other end of the second cable toa good metallic surface on the engine orframe of the disabled vehicle.


Do not connect the end of the secondcable to the negative (S) terminal of thebattery to be jumped. A spark may causean explosion of the gases that surroundthe battery.


220

[RE03100(ALL)04/95]


Jumper cable connections

[RE03200( T)02/95]


The 3.4L SHO engine


221

*[RE03400(ALL)03/95] Jump-Starting

*[RE03600(ALL)03/95] 1. Make sure that the jumper cables are not inthe way of moving engine parts, then startthe booster vehicle. Run the engine at amoderate speed.

*[RE03700(ALL)03/95] 2. Let the discharged battery charge for a fewminutes and then start the disabled vehicle.It may take a couple of tries before thevehicle starts. If the vehicle does not startafter several attempts, there may be adifferent problem.

*[RE03800(ALL)03/95] 3. When both vehicles are running, let themidle for a few minutes to charge thedischarged battery.

%*[RE03900(ALL)03/95] Removing jumper cables

*[RE04000(ALL)03/95] 1. Always remove the jumper cables in thereverse order. Remove the negative (S) endof the jumper cable from the metallic surfaceon the engine or frame of the disabledvehicle.

*[RE04100(ALL)06/95] 2. Remove the negative (S) cable from thebooster battery.

*[RE04200(ALL)06/95] 3. Remove the positive (+) cable from thebooster battery.

*[RE04300(ALL)05/95] 4. Remove the other end of the positive (+)cable from the discharged battery.

*[RE04400(ALL)11/95] After the vehicle is started, let it idle for a whileto let the engine “relearn” its idle conditions.Drive it around for a while with all electricalaccessories turned off to let the battery recharge.Driveability may be deteriorated slightly until alldrive modes are “relearned.” You may need touse a battery charger to fully recharge thebattery.


222

*[RE04450(ALL)03/95] If you need to replace your battery, see Batteryin the Servicing Your Vehicle chapter.

%*[RE04500(ALL)03/95] Changing a Tire

*[RE04600(ALL)01/95] If you get a flat tire while you are driving, donot apply the brake heavily. Instead, graduallydecrease the speed. Hold the steering wheelfirmly and slowly move to a safe place on theside of the road. Park on a level spot, turn offthe ignition, set the parking brake, and turn onthe hazard flashers.

[RE04610(ALL)01/95] NOTE: Tire sealants that are injected throughthe valve stem are not to be used toservice punctured tires because theycan produce wheel rust and tireimbalance.

%*[RE04700(ALL)03/95] The Temporary Spare Tire

*[RE04800(ALL)03/95] You may have a high pressure temporary sparetire. This spare tire is smaller than a regular tireand is designed for emergency use only. Use itonly when you get a flat tire and replace it assoon as you can. This spare tire is marked withthe words “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” so thatyou can easily identify it.


If you use the temporary spare tirecontinuously or do not follow theseprecautions, the tire could fail, causingyou to lose control of the vehicle, possiblyinjuring yourself or others.


223

*[RE05000(ALL)01/95] When you drive with the temporary spare tire,DO NOT:

*[RE05100(ALL)01/95] ❑exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) under anycircumstances.

*[RE05200(ALL)01/95] ❑ load your vehicle so that it is heavier thanthe maximum vehicle load rating listed onthe tire decal.

*[RE05300(ALL)01/95] ❑ tow a trailer.

*[RE05400(ALL)01/95] ❑use tire chains on this tire.

*[RE05500(ALL)01/95] ❑ try to repair the temporary spare tire orremove it from its wheel.

*[RE05600(ALL)01/95] ❑use the wheel for any other type of vehicle.

*[RE05700(ALL)01/95] ❑drive through an automatic car wash withthis tire. Because the temporary spare tire issmaller than a conventional tire, it reducesthe ground clearance. Your vehicle may getcaught in the rails and it could be damaged.

% [RE05800(ALL)11/94] The Conventional Spare Tire (If equipped)

*[RE05900(ALL)01/95] If you have the conventional spare tire, you canuse it as a spare or as a regular tire. This sparetire is identical to the other tires that come withyour vehicle, although the wheel may not match.

%*[RE06000(ALL)03/95] Spare Tire Location

[RE06100(ALL)04/95] In a sedan, the spare tire is stored in the trunkunder the floor carpet.


224

[RE06200( T)12/95]


The spare tire in the SHO

[RE06250(ALL)02/95]


The spare tire in the sedan


225

[RE06300(ALL)11/94] In the wagon, the temporary spare tire is storedin the left side rear trim panel.

[RE06400(ALL)02/95]


The temporary spare tire in the wagon

[RE06700(ALL)11/94] To remove the cover for the temporary sparetire in the wagon:

[RE06800(ALL)04/95] 1. Twist the three fasteners 90 degrees into avertical position.

[RE06900(ALL)02/95] 2. Lift the the cover to disengage the threeretainers.

[RE07000(ALL)05/94] 3. Pull the front of the cover out slightly andremove the cover by sliding it toward thefront of the vehicle.

*[RE07100(ALL)01/89] 4. Lift out the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.

%*[RE07400(ALL)03/95] Preparing to Change the Tire

*[RE07500(ALL)05/94] You should only raise your vehicle with a jackproperly placed at the front or rear jackingpoints.

*[RE07600(ALL)03/95] 1. Make sure that your vehicle will not moveor roll. Put the gearshift in P (Park). Set theparking brake and block the wheel that isdiagonally opposite the tire that you arechanging.


226

[RE07700(ALL)07/95] When one of the front wheels is off the ground,the transaxle alone will not prevent the vehiclefrom moving or slipping off the jack, even if thevehicle is in P (Park). To prevent the vehiclefrom moving when you change a tire, block (inboth directions) the wheel that is diagonallyopposite to the tire being changed.


If the vehicle slips off the jack, you orsomeone else could be seriously injured.

*[RE08800(ALL)03/95] 2. Get out the spare tire and jack.


To avoid injury, never run the enginewith one wheel off the ground, such aswhen changing a tire.

% [RE08900(ALL)02/93] 3. Remove wheel covers or aluminum wheelornaments with the tapered end of a wheelnut wrench. Insert the handle of the wrenchbetween the wheel and ornament and twistit against the inner wheel cover flange.

*[RE09200(ALL)09/95] 4. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turncounterclockwise, but do not remove themuntil the tire is raised off the ground. Youshould pull up on the handle rather thanpush to develop maximum force to loosenwheel lug nuts. See Anti-Theft Wheel LugNuts later in this chapter for information onremoving anti-theft lug nuts.


227

%*[RE09250(ALL)05/95] Removing and Replacing the Tire

%*[RE09300(ALL)11/94] 1. Find the jack notch next to the door of thetire that you are changing. Put the jack inthe jack notch and turn the handle of thejack clockwise until the wheel is completelyoff the ground.


To lessen the risk of personal injury, donot put any part of your body under thevehicle while changing a tire. Do not startthe engine when your vehicle is on thejack. The jack is only meant for changingthe tire.

[RE10000(ALL)02/95]


The notches for the jack

% [RE12000(ALL)11/94] 2. Remove the lug nuts by using a lug wrench.Never loosen the hub nuts. See the picturelater in this section if you are not sure whereto find the lug nuts.


228

*[RE12002(ALL)08/95] Your vehicle has metric (12 mm) wheel studsand lug nuts. During wheel removal andreplacement, make certain that you use the samelug nuts to reinstall the wheel or replace themwith nuts of the same metric size and threading.


Installation of an English thread nut on ametric stud (or vice-versa) will notproperly secure the wheel to the hub.Damaged studs may result in wheelseparation and possible injury.

*[RE12100(ALL)01/95] 3. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,making sure that the air valve stem is facingoutward.

*[RE12200(ALL)03/95] 4. Reinstall the lug nuts, tightening until thewheel is snug against the hub. The bevelededges on the lug nuts face inward. Do notfully tighten the lug nuts until you lower thevehicle. If you do, you could force thevehicle off the jack.

*[RE12300(ALL)01/95] 5. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handlecounterclockwise.

*[RE12400(ALL)01/95] 6. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lugnuts in the order shown in the followingillustration. As soon as possible, have yourdealer or a qualified service technician checkthe lug nuts for proper torque specifications.


229

% [RE12500(ALL)12/91]


The lug nuts on the wheel

*[RE12600(ALL)01/95] 7. Place any wheel covers and ornaments in thetrunk.

*[RE12700(ALL)03/95] 8. Put the tire, jack, and wrench away. Makesure the jack is securely fastened so it doesnot rattle when you drive.

*[RE12750(ALL)06/95] 9. Unblock the wheels.

[RE13007(ALL)04/95] Removing and Replacing Wheel Covers

[RE13008(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle may have wheel covers with a wireretention system.

*[RE13009(ALL)03/95] To remove the wheel cover:

[RE13010(ALL)04/95] Pry it loose by carefully inserting the taperedend of the jack handle between the wheel coverand the wheel.


230

*[RE13011(ALL)04/95] To replace the wheel cover:

[RE13012(ALL)04/95] 1. One of the windows on the wheel cover isidentified with a valve stem logo on theback side of the cover. Install the wheelcover to the wheel with the window at thevalve stem.

[RE13013(ALL)04/95] 2. Hold the wheel cover in this position andpress the cover onto the wheel with thepalm of your hand. Do not force or hammerthe cover.

%*[RE13015(ALL)02/95] Center Wheel Cover

*[RE13020(ALL)03/95] To remove the wheel cover:

[RE13022(ALL)11/94] 1. Pry the center ornament off the wheelcoverwith the lug wrench. Pry only at the notch.Do not use a screwdriver or any other tool,as this may damage the wheelcover or thesurface finish.

[RE13024(ALL)04/95] 2. Remove the center bolt on the wheelcoverwith the lug wrench tip.

[RE13026(ALL)11/94] 3. To remove the wheelcover, pry it loose bycarefully inserting the tapered end of the lugwrench between the wheelcover and wheelat the outer edge.

[RE13028(ALL)11/94] 4. To service the wheel or tire, remove thepedestal by removing the lug nuts. Put thepedestal in a safe place for reinstallation ofthe wheelcover.


231

[RE13040(ALL)11/94]


The center attachment wheel cover

*[RE13050(ALL)04/95] To replace the wheel cover:

[RE13070(ALL)11/94] 1. Reinstall the pedestal on the wheel beforereinstalling the wheelcover.

[RE13080(ALL)11/94] 2. One of the windows on the wheelcover isidentified with a valve stem logo on theinside of the cover. Align this valve hole onthe wheelcover with the valve stem on thewheel. Reinstall the cover by pressing withthe palm of your hand. Do not use excessiveforce. Do not use a hammer.

[RE13090(ALL)11/94] 3. Attach the bolt to the pedestal through thecenter hole in the cover with the lug wrench.

[RE14000(ALL)11/94] 4. Align the legs of the center ornament withthe slots on the wheel cover. Reinstall theornament by pressing with the palm of yourhand. Do not use excessive force. Do not usea hammer.


232

%*[RE14100(ALL)03/95] Anti-Theft Wheel Lug Nuts (If equipped)

[RE14200(ALL)03/95] If your vehicle has this feature, one of the lugnuts on each wheel lock must be removed andreplaced with a special key. The key andregistration card are attached to the lug wrenchand stored with the spare tire. If you lose thekey, send the registration card to themanufacturer (not to the dealer) to get areplacement key.

*[RE14250(ALL)03/95] NOTE: If entire lug wrench/lug nut keyassembly is lost, see your nearest Fordor Lincoln-Mercury dealer who hasaccess to a master set of keys.

[RE14275(ALL)11/94] DO NOT USE THE KEY WITH AN IMPACTWRENCH.

[RE14300(ALL)04/95]


The anti-theft lug nut and key

[RE14350( T)02/95]


The anti-theft lug nut and key (SHO only)


233

*[RE14400(ALL)03/95] Removing the anti-theft lug nut

*[RE14600(ALL)03/95] Insert the key over the locking lug nut. Makesure that you hold the key square to the lug nut.If you hold the key on an angle, you maydamage the key and the lug nut.

*[RE14700(ALL)03/95] Place the lug nut wrench over the lug nut keyand apply pressure on the key with the wrench.Turn the wrench in a counterclockwise directionto remove the lug nut.

*[RE14800(ALL)09/95] Reinstalling the anti-theft lug nut

*[RE14900(ALL)03/95] Insert the key over the locking lug nut. Place thelug nut wrench over the lug nut key and, whileapplying pressure on the key, install the lug nut.

*[RE15050(ALL)03/95] If the Engine Cranks But DoesNot Start or Does Not Start Aftera Collision

*[RE15100(ALL)07/95] The Fuel Pump Shut-off Switch

*[RE15200(ALL)07/95] If the engine cranks but does not start or if youhave had a collision, the fuel pump shut-offswitch may have been triggered. The shut-offswitch is a device that stops the fuel pumpwhen your vehicle has been involved in asubstantial jolt.

*[RE15250(ALL)07/95] For information on how to check and reset thefuel pump shut-off switch, see Fuel pump shut-offswitch in the Index.

%*[RE16400(ALL)05/95] Towing Your Vehicle[RE16500(ALL)10/95] If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact

a professional towing service or, if you are amember, your roadside assistance center. YourTaurus should be towed from the front unlessconditions do not allow it. It is recommendedthat your vehicle be towed with wheel lift orflatbed equipment.


234

*[RE17550(ALL)10/95]

three fourths page art:0001463-A

*[RE17600(ALL)03/95] When calling for a tow truck, tell the operatorwhat kind of vehicle you have. A towingmanual is available from Ford Motor Companyfor all authorized tow truck operators. Haveyour tow truck driver refer to this manual forthe proper hook-up and towing procedures foryour vehicle.


235

*[RE18000(ALL)03/95] Towing Your Vehicle Behind AnotherVehicle

*[RE18100(ALL)03/95] At times, you may want to tow your vehiclebehind another vehicle, such as a recreationalvehicle, a car, or a truck.

*[RE18200(ALL)03/95] Before you have your vehicle towed:

*[RE18300(ALL)03/95] ❑Release the parking brake.

*[RE18400(ALL)03/95] ❑Move the gearshift to N (Neutral).

[RE18500(ALL)01/95] ❑Turn the key in the ignition to OFF.

*[RE18600(ALL)03/95] ❑Unlock the steering wheel.

[RE18700(ALL)01/95] Do not tow your vehicle at a speed faster than35 mph (56 km/h) or for a distance greater than50 miles (80 km), unless the drive wheels areplaced on dollies.


Never use a tow bar that attaches to thebumper when you tow your vehicle. Thiscould damage the bumper and cause anaccident.


237

Customer Assistance

%*[HS00205(ALL)06/94] Roadside Assistance

*[HS00210(ALL)11/95] Ford Motor Company has set up a 24-hour,seven-day-a-week hotline with trained operatorswho put you in touch with the help you need ifyou experience a problem with your vehicle.This complimentary service is provided to youthroughout your warranty period of 3 years or36,000 miles (60,000 km), whichever comes first.To purchase Roadside Assistance coveragesbeyond this period (available through Ford AutoClub in the United States or Ford andLincoln-Mercury dealers in Canada), contactyour Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. AdditionalRoadside Assistance coverage is unavailable inPuerto Rico and the Virgin Islands.

*[HS00215(ALL)06/94] Roadside Assistance will cover the following:

*[HS00220(ALL)06/94] ❑Mount your spare if you have a flat tire.

*[HS00225(ALL)06/94] ❑ Jump-start your battery if it is dead.

*[HS00230(ALL)06/94] ❑Unlock your vehicle if you are locked out.

*[HS00235(ALL)06/94] ❑Bring you fuel if you run out.

*[HS00240(ALL)06/94] ❑Tow your vehicle if you are stranded. Evennon-warranty related tows, like accidents orgetting stuck in mud or snow, are covered(some exclusions apply, such as impoundtowing and repossession).

File:13fchst.exUpdate:Mon Jan 22 16:02:19 1996

238

*[HS00245(ALL)06/94] How to use Roadside Assistance

*[HS00250(ALL)06/94] Your Roadside Assistance identification card canbe found in the Owner Guide portfolio in yourglove compartment. Complete the card and placeit in your wallet for quick reference.

*[HS00255(ALL)04/95] To receive roadside assistance in the UnitedStates call 1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call1-800-665-2006).

*[HS00260(ALL)04/95] Should you need to arrange for roadsideassistance yourself, Ford Motor Company willreimburse the reasonable cost. To obtaininformation about reimbursement call1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call 1-800-665-2006).

*[HS00300(ALL)01/95] If You Have a Service Problem

*[HS00400(ALL)01/95] Ford Motor Company has authorized Ford andLincoln-Mercury dealerships that can serviceyour vehicle for you. This chapter tells you howto get service or maintenance for your vehicle.

%*[HS00505(ALL)02/95] Service/Maintenance Concerns(U.S. or Canada)

*[HS00600(ALL)04/95] Ford recommends taking your vehicle to yourselling dealer who wants to ensure yourcontinued satisfaction. You may, however, takeyour vehicle to any authorized Ford orLincoln-Mercury dealer. In most cases, yourdealer will be able to resolve your concern.

*[HS00700(ALL)04/95] If you are not satisfied with the service youreceived from your dealership’s servicedepartment, talk to the service manager at thedealership, or if you still are not satisfied, talk tothe owner or general manager of the dealership.In most cases, you will have your concernresolved at this level.


239

*[HS01000(ALL)03/95] If you are away from home when your vehicleneeds to be serviced, or if you need more helpthan the dealer gave you, contact the FordCustomer Assistance Center to find anauthorized dealership that may be able to help.

*[HS01100(ALL)02/95] If you live in the U.S. and have any questions orconcerns that the dealership cannot answer,contact the Customer Assistance Center.

%*[HS01125(ALL)03/95]


*[HS01150(ALL)03/95] If you live in Canada and have any questions orconcerns that the dealership cannot answer,contact the Customer Assistance Centre.

%*[HS01175(ALL)04/95]


*[HS01200(ALL)04/95] Please have the following information availablewhen contacting the Customer Assistance Centre:

*[HS01300(ALL)04/95] ❑your telephone number (both business andhome)

*[HS01400(ALL)04/95] ❑ the name of the dealer and the city where thedealership is located

*[HS01500(ALL)03/95] ❑ the year and make of your vehicle

*[HS01550(ALL)03/95] ❑ the date purchased


240

*[HS01600(ALL)03/95] ❑ the current mileage on your vehicle

%*[HS01700(ALL)09/95] ❑your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)listed on your owner card and/or yourvehicle ownership license

[HS01800(ALL)03/95]


Vehicle Identification Number (VIN/Serial Number)

*[HS02200(ALL)03/95] If you still have a service or product complaint,you may wish to contact the Dispute SettlementBoard (U.S. only) or the Canadian Motor VehicleArbitration Plan (CAMVAP) in Canada.

%*[HS02300(ALL)02/95] The Dispute Settlement Board(U.S. Only)

*[HS02400(ALL)03/95] The Dispute Settlement Board is a voluntary,independent dispute-settlement programavailable free to owners or lessees of qualifyingFord Motor Company vehicles.

*[HS02500(ALL)01/95] The Dispute Settlement Board may not beavailable in all states. Ford Motor Companyreserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations, modify procedures and/or todiscontinue this process at any time withoutnotice and without incurring obligations.

*[HS02600(ALL)01/95] What Kind of Cases Does the BoardReview?

*[HS02700(ALL)08/95] The Board reviews unresolved warrantyperformance complaints on Ford, Mercury andLincoln cars and Ford and Mercury Light Trucksunder warranty that have not been resolved by adealer or Ford Motor Company.


241

*[HS02750(ALL)03/95] The Board does not review issues involving:

*[HS02800(ALL)01/95] ❑A non-Ford product

*[HS02900(ALL)01/95] ❑A non-Ford dealership

*[HS03100(ALL)01/95] ❑A vehicle sales transaction

*[HS03200(ALL)01/95] ❑A request for reimbursement of consequentialexpenses unless incidental to a service orproduct complaint being reviewed

*[HS03300(ALL)01/95] ❑ Items not covered by your warranty

*[HS03400(ALL)01/95] ❑Alleged liability claims

*[HS03450(ALL)01/95] ❑Property damage where such damage issignificant when compared to the economicloss alleged under the warranty dispute

*[HS03500(ALL)01/95] ❑Cases currently in litigation

*[HS03600(ALL)01/95] ❑Vehicles not used primarily for personal,family, or household purposes

*[HS03650(ALL)01/95] NOTE: Complaints involving vehicles onwhich applicable express written newvehicle warranties have expired atreceipt of your application are noteligible. Eligibility may differaccording to state law. For example, seethe unique brochure for Californiapurchasers/lessees.

*[HS03700(ALL)04/95] How Does the Board Work?

*[HS03800(ALL)04/95] The Board has four members:

*[HS03900(ALL)04/95] ❑ three consumer representatives

*[HS04000(ALL)04/95] ❑a Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer

*[HS04200(ALL)04/95] Consumer candidates for Board membership arerecruited and trained by an independentconsulting firm. Dealers are chosen because oftheir business leadership qualities.


242

*[HS04300(ALL)04/95] If the involved vehicle is within 36 months and36,000 miles of the date of delivery (warrantystart date), you have a right to make an oralpresentation before the Board by indicating yourchoice on the application. Also, oralpresentations may be requested by the Board. Adecision is made by the Board by simplemajority vote.

*[HS04350(ALL)04/95] Board members review all the materials relatedto each complaint and, based on the availableinformation, arrive at a fair and impartialdecision. Decisions are based on the writtenstatements and any oral presentations made byeach of the involved parties.

*[HS04400(ALL)04/95] Because the Board usually meets only once amonth, some cases will take longer than 30 daysto be reviewed. The Board will make everyeffort to resolve each case within 40 days after itreceives the customer application form.

*[HS04500(ALL)04/95] After your case has been reviewed, the Boardwill mail you its decision in writing. It will alsoprovide you with a form to indicate youracceptance or rejection of an award decision. Thedecisions of the Board are binding on the dealerand Ford, but customers may have other optionsavailable to them under state or federal law.

*[HS04600(ALL)04/95] The decisions of the Board, however, may beintroduced into evidence by any party insubsequent legal proceedings that may beinitiated.


243

*[HS04700(ALL)01/95] How Do You Contact the Board?

*[HS04800(ALL)04/95] Write to the Board at the following address torequest a brochure/application. You will be senta brochure and a one-page customer applicationform. The form should be completed and mailedto the same address.

*[HS04900(ALL)02/93]


*[HS05100(ALL)04/95] What is the Review Process?

*[HS05200(ALL)04/95] Your application will be reviewed and if it isdetermined to be eligible, you will receive anacknowledgment indicating the file numberassigned to your application and the local Boardaddress. At the same time, your dealer and FordMotor Company representative are asked tosubmit statements.

*[HS05300(ALL)04/95] To review your case properly, the Board needsthe following information:

*[HS05400(ALL)04/95] ❑ legible copies of all documents andmaintenance or repair orders that relate tothe case

*[HS05500(ALL)08/95] ❑ the year, make, model, and vehicleidentification number (VIN)

*[HS05600(ALL)04/95] ❑ the date you bought your vehicle

*[HS05700(ALL)04/95] ❑ the date of repair and the mileage at the timeof repair

*[HS05800(ALL)04/95] ❑ the current mileage


244

*[HS05900(ALL)04/95] ❑ the name of the dealer who sold you thevehicle or who serviced your vehicle

*[HS06000(ALL)04/95] ❑a brief description of your unresolvedcomplaint

*[HS06100(ALL)05/95] ❑a brief summary of actions that were takenwith the dealer and Ford Motor Company

*[HS06200(ALL)05/95] ❑ the names (if known) of all people youcontacted at the dealership

*[HS06300(ALL)04/95] ❑a description of the action you want done toresolve your concern.

*[HS06305(ALL)07/95] Should your application NOT qualify for review,an explanation will be mailed to you.

%*[HS06320(ALL)04/95] Reporting Safety Defects(U.S. Only)

*[HS06340(ALL)01/95] If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could cause injuryor death, you should immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford MotorCompany.

*[HS06360(ALL)01/95] If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer, or FordMotor Company.

*[HS06380(ALL)01/95] To contact NHTSA, you may either call the AutoSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or writeto: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation,400 Seventh Street, Washington D.C. 20590. Youcan also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from the Hotline.


245

%*[HS07700(ALL)05/95] Ford of Canada CustomerAssistance

*[HS07800(ALL)08/95] Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited

*[HS07850(ALL)03/95] If you live in Canada and have any questions orconcerns that the dealership cannot answer,contact the Customer Assistance Centre.

*[HS07950(ALL)03/95]


*[HS07960(ALL)04/95] Please have the following information availablewhen contacting the Customer Assistance Centre:

*[HS07980(ALL)04/95] ❑your telephone number (both business andhome)

*[HS08000(ALL)04/95] ❑your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)listed on your owner card and/or yourvehicle ownership license.

*[HS08020(ALL)03/95] ❑ the year and make of your vehicle

*[HS08040(ALL)03/95] ❑ the date purchased

*[HS08060(ALL)04/95] ❑ the name of the dealer and the city where thedealership is located

*[HS08080(ALL)04/95] ❑ the current mileage on your vehicle.


246

%*[HS08100(ALL)09/95] Mediation/Arbitration Program(Canada Only)

*[HS08200(ALL)09/95] In those cases where you continue to feel thatthe efforts by Ford and the dealer to resolve afactory-related vehicle service concern have beenunsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in animpartial third party mediation/arbitrationprogram administered by the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

*[HS08300(ALL)09/95] The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward andrelative speedy alternative to resolve adisagreement when all other efforts to produce asettlement have failed. This procedure is withoutcost to you and is designed to eliminate theneed for lengthy and expensive legalproceedings.

*[HS08400(ALL)09/95] In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-partyArbitrators conduct hearings at mutuallyconvenient times and places in an informalenviroment. These impartial Arbitrators reviewthe positions of the parties, make decisions and,where appropriate, render awards to resolvedisputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair andfinal as the Arbitrator’s award is binding onboth you and Ford of Cananda.

*[HS08450(ALL)09/95] CAMVAP services are available in all territoriesand provinces, except Quebec. For moreinformation, without charge or obligation, callyour CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directlyat 1-800-207-0685.

*[HS08500(ALL)10/95] This plan is not available in the province ofQuebec.


247

%*[HS08600(ALL)06/95] Getting Help Outside the U.S.and Canada

*[HS08700(ALL)06/95] Before you export your vehicle to a foreigncountry, contact the appropriate foreign embassyor consulate to make sure local regulations donot prevent you from registering your vehicle.Officials at the embassy can also help you decidewhether you should import your vehicle to thatcountry.

*[HS08800(ALL)06/95] Officials at the embassy or consulate can tell youwhere to get unleaded fuel. If you cannot getunleaded fuel or can get only fuel with ananti-knock index that is lower than your vehicleneeds, contact a district or owner relations officebefore you leave the U.S. or Canada.

*[HS08900(ALL)06/95] Use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without aproper conversion may damage the effectivenessof your emissions control system and may causeengine knocking or serious engine damage. FordMotor Company is not responsible for anydamage that is caused by use of improper fuel.

*[HS09000(ALL)06/95] You may also have difficulty importing yourvehicle back into the U.S. if you use leaded fuel.

*[HS09100(ALL)06/95] If your vehicle must be serviced while you aretraveling or living in Central or South America,the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact thenearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannothelp you, write to:

*[HS09200(ALL)06/95]



248

*[HS09300(ALL)06/95] If you are in other foreign countries, contact thenearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannothelp you, they can direct you to the appropriateFord affiliate office.

*[HS09400(ALL)06/95] If you buy your vehicle in North America andthen relocate outside of the U.S. or Canada,register your Vehicle Identification Number andnew address with Ford Motor Company ExportOperations.


249

Accessories

*[AC00200(ALL)03/95] Ford Accessories for Your Vehicle

*[AC00225(ALL)04/95] Ford has many fine products available fromyour dealer to clean your vehicle and protect itsfinishes. For best results, use the following, orproducts of equivalent quality:

[AC00250(ALL)10/95]

twelve pica chart:0001434-B

*[AC00300(ALL)04/95] A wide selection of accessories is availablethrough your local authorized dealer. These fineaccessories have been engineered specifically tofulfill your automotive needs. They are customdesigned to complement the style andaerodynamic appearance of your Ford-builtvehicle. In addition, each accessory is made fromhigh quality materials and meets or exceedsFord’s rigid engineering and safety specifications.That is why Ford brand accessories arewarranted for up to 3 years or 36,000 miles(60,000 km), whichever comes first. See yourdealer for complete warranty information andaccessory availability.

File:14fcact.exUpdate:Mon Jan 22 16:03:51 1996

250

*[AC00350(ALL)06/95] Safety, Comfort, and Convenience

[AC00400(ALL)07/95]

twenty-eight pica chart:0000569-M

*[AC00600(ALL)01/95] NOTE: When adding accessories, equipment,passengers, and luggage to yourvehicle, do not exceed the total weightcapacity of the vehicle or of the frontor rear axle (GVWR, GAWR as shownon the Safety Compliance CertificationLabel). Consult your dealer for specificweight information.


251

*[AC00700(ALL)05/95] NOTE: The Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) or the CanadianRadio Telecommunications Commission(CRTC) regulates the use of mobilecommunications systems — such astwo-way radios, telephones, and theftalarms — that are equipped with radiotransmitters. Any such equipmentinstalled in your vehicle should complywith FCC or CRTC regulations andshould be installed only by a qualifiedtechnician.

*[AC00800(ALL)01/95] NOTE: Mobile communications systems mayharm the operation of your vehicle,particularly if they are not properlydesigned for automotive use or are notproperly installed. For example, whenoperated, such systems may cause theengine to stumble or stall. In addition,such systems may themselves bedamaged or their operation affected byoperating your vehicle. (Citizens band[CB] transceivers, garage door openers,and other transmitters whose poweroutput is 5 watts or less will notordinarily affect your vehicle’soperation.)

*[AC00900(ALL)05/95] NOTE: Because we have no control over theinstallation, design, or manufacture ofsuch systems, Ford cannot assumeresponsibility for any adverse effects ordamage that may result if you use thisequipment.


252

% [AC01000( T)04/95]

thirty-six pica chart:0001392-A


253

[AC01100( T)04/95]



254

[AC01200( T)04/95]



255

Servicing Your Taurus

%*[SV00300(ALL)03/95] Service Made Easy

*[SV00400(ALL)01/95] Ford has two goals for servicing your vehicle.

*[SV00500(ALL)01/95] 1. When we can, we design parts that do notneed to be serviced.

*[SV00600(ALL)01/95] 2. We want to make servicing your vehicle aseasy as possible. To help you:

*[SV00700(ALL)01/95] ❑We highlight do-it-yourself items in yellow inthe engine compartment so that you can findthem easily.

*[SV00800(ALL)01/95] ❑When possible, we design parts — such asthe headlamp bulbs — that can be replacedwithout tools.

*[SV00900(ALL)05/94] ❑We give you a Maintenance Schedule thatmakes tracking routine service for yourvehicle easy. The maintenance schedule islocated in the Maintenance Schedule and Recordbooklet.

*[SV01000(ALL)01/95] This chapter tells you about the basic parts thatyou need to check and service regularly.

*[SV01100(ALL)03/95] If your vehicle needs professional servicing, seethe Customer Assistance chapter.

*[SV01200(ALL)03/95] Check your Warranty Information Booklet to findout which parts are covered.

File:15fcsvt.exUpdate:Tue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996

256

*[SV01250(ALL)03/95] Ford Motor Company recommends that youperform the Owner Maintenance Checks listed inthe Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet.These services are important for the properoperation of your vehicle. In addition to theconditions listed in the Owner MaintenanceChecklist, be alert for any unusual noise,vibration, or other indication that your vehiclemay need service. If you do notice somethingunusual, see that your vehicle is servicedpromptly.

[SV01275(ALL)03/95] Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids,and service parts conforming to specifications.Motorcraft parts are designed and built toprovide the best performance in your vehicle.Using these parts for replacement is yourassurance that Ford-built quality stays in yourvehicle.

%*[SV01300(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotivefluids in a responsible manner. Followyour community’s standards fordisposing of these types of fluids. Callyour local recycling center to find outabout recycling automotive fluids.

%*[SV01600(ALL)06/95] Precautions When Servicing YourVehicle

*[SV01700(ALL)06/95] Be especially careful when inspecting orservicing your vehicle. Here are some generalprecautions for your safety:

[SV01800(ALL)10/95] ❑Do not work on a hot engine. The enginecooling fans may come on unexpectedly.Always turn the engine off and let it cool.


257

[SV01850(ALL)10/95] RWARNING

The cooling fans are automatic and maycome on at any time. Always disconnectthe negative terminal of the battery beforeworking near the fan.

*[SV01900(ALL)06/95] ❑ If you must work with the engine running,avoid wearing loose clothing or jewelry thatcould get caught in moving parts. Takeappropriate precautions with long hair.

*[SV02000(ALL)06/95] ❑Do not work on a vehicle in an enclosedspace with the engine running, unless you aresure you have enough ventilation.

*[SV02100(ALL)08/95] ❑Never get under a vehicle while it issupported by a jack only. If you must workunder a vehicle, use safety stands.

*[SV02200(ALL)06/95] ❑Keep all lit cigarettes and other smokingmaterials away from the battery and allfuel-related parts.

*[SV02250(ALL)03/95] If you disconnect the battery, the engine must“relearn” its idle conditions before your vehiclewill drive properly. To find out how the enginedoes this, see Battery in this chapter.

*[SV02550(ALL)03/95] Working with the engine off:

*[SV02600(ALL)03/95] 1. Set the parking brake fully and make surethat the gearshift is securely latched in P(Park).

*[SV02625(ALL)06/95] 2. Remove the key from the ignition after youturn the engine off.

*[SV02650(ALL)06/95] 3. Block the wheels. This will prevent yourvehicle from moving unexpectedly.


258

*[SV02700(ALL)03/95] Working with the engine on:

*[SV02800(ALL)03/95] 1. Set the parking brake fully and make surethat the gearshift is securely latched in P(Park).

*[SV02825(ALL)03/95] 2. Block the wheels. This will prevent yourvehicle from moving unexpectedly.

*[SV03000(ALL)02/95] RWARNING

Do not start your engine with the aircleaner removed and do not remove itwhile the engine is running.

%*[SV03100(ALL)03/95] Opening the Hood

%*[SV03200(ALL)01/95] 1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood releasehandle located under the bottom left cornerof the instrument panel.

%*[SV03300(ALL)02/95] 2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release theauxiliary latch that is located under the hoodat the center of the vehicle.

*[SV03400(ALL)01/95] 3. Lift the hood until the lift cylinders hold itopen.

*[SV03500(ALL)01/95] Whenever you close the hood, latch it securely.


259

[SV03550(ALL)11/94]

full page art:0000689-E

The hood release, hood latch, and lift cylinder assembly


260

*[SV04350(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Read and understand Precautions WhenServicing Your Vehicle at the beginningof this chapter before opening thehood.

%*[SV04500(ALL)04/95] Engine Compartment

*[SV04600(ALL)09/93] Your vehicle has one of these types of engines:

[SV04700(ALL)10/95] ❑a 3.0L Vulcan engine

[SV04750(ALL)10/95] ❑a 3.0L Duratec engine

[SV04775( T)08/95] ❑a 3.4L SHO engine

*[SV04850(ALL)11/94] The following pages show diagrams of eachengine type and where to find items that youshould regularly service.


261

%[SV05000(ALL)02/95]


Th

e3.0

literV

ulcan

engin

e

File:15fcsvt.exU

pdate:T

ue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996

262

[SV05025(ALL)02/95]


Th

e3.0

literD

uratec

engin

e

File:15fcsvt.exU

pdate:T

ue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996

263

[SV05050(T)02/95]


Th

e3.4

literS

HO

engin

e

File:15fcsvt.exU

pdate:T

ue Jan 23 13:58:51 1996

264

%*[SV05075(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Engine

*[SV06000(ALL)07/95] A clean engine is more efficient because theengine is able to cool properly. A build up ofgrease and dirt acts as an insulator, keeping theengine warmer than normal.

*[SV06020(ALL)07/95] ❑Extreme care must be used if a power washeris used to clean the engine. The high pressurefluid could penetrate sealed parts andassemblies causing damage or malfunctions.

*[SV06040(ALL)08/95] ❑ In order to avoid possible cracking of theengine block or fuel injection pump, do notspray a hot engine or injection pump withcold water.

*[SV06060(ALL)07/95] ❑The alternator, distributor and air intake mustbe covered. Covering these components willhelp prevent water damage.

*[SV06080(ALL)04/95] ❑Never wash or rinse the engine while it isrunning. Water getting into the engine maycause internal damage.

%*[SV06100(ALL)03/95] Filling the Fuel Tank[SV06800(ALL)04/95] 1. Turn the engine off. After opening the fuel

door, remove the cap carefully and slowlyby turning it counterclockwise 1/4 turn untilit stops. Pull to remove the cap. A tetherattaches the cap to the fuel filler pipe.

[SV06825(ALL)04/95]



265


The fuel system may be under pressure. Ifthe fuel cap is venting vapor or if youhear a hissing sound, wait until it stopsbefore completely removing the cap.Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injureyou or others.

*[SV06900(ALL)05/95] 2. Make sure that you pump unleaded fuel andput the nozzle all the way inside the fuelfiller pipe.

[SV06950(ALL)09/95] NOTE: To help reduce early nozzle shutoffsand fuel spillage, park your vehicle sothat the fuel filler door is notdownhill. Do not tilt or turn the nozzleupside down when filling. Avoidexcessively fast fuel dispensing rates(over 10 gallons [38 liters] per minute).

*[SV07150(ALL)08/95] NOTE: If you spill any fuel on the body ofyour vehicle, clean it off immediately.The fuel may dull or soften the paintif you do not wash it off.

[SV07200(ALL)10/95] 3. To replace the fuel cap, align the tabs on thecap with the notches on the filler pipe. Turnit clockwise until it stops.

*[SV07250(ALL)10/95] 4. Push the fuel door closed.

[SV07275(ALL)04/95] If the Service Engine Soon warning light comeson and stays on when you start the engine, thefuel cap may not be properly seated. Turn offthe engine, remove the fuel cap and replace it,being careful to align the cap properly. For moreinformation, see Warning lights in the Index.

*[SV07290(ALL)07/95] If you lose the fuel cap, replace it with anauthorized Motorcraft or equivalent part.


266

%*[SV07300(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

If you do not use the proper fuel cap, thepressure in the fuel tank can damage thefuel system or cause it to work improperlyin a collision.

*[SV07350(ALL)05/95] NOTE: If you replace your fuel cap with anaftermarket fuel filler cap, the customerwarranty may be void for any damageto the fuel tank and/or fuel system.

%*[SV07500(ALL)06/95] Choosing the Right Fuel

[SV07601(ALL)12/95] Use only UNLEADED FUEL. Using leaded fuelis prohibited by federal law. Any vehicledamage may not be covered by your warranty.

%*[SV08725(ALL)05/95] Octane Recommendations

[SV08750( T)02/95] All models except SHO 3.4L

[SV08800(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is designed to use regular fuelwith an octane rating of 87. In most cases it isnot necessary to use a fuel with an octane ratinghigher than 87. At service stations, the octanerating is displayed in a label on the pumps.

*[SV08900(ALL)06/95]


Typical octane rating label

[SV09000(ALL)12/95] We do not recommend gasolines labeled“regular” that are sold with octane ratings of 86or even less in high altitude areas.


267

[SV09100(ALL)12/95] Do not be concerned if your vehicle sometimesknocks lightly. However, if it knocks heavilyunder most driving conditions on therecommended octane rating fuel, see your dealeror a qualified service technician to prevent anyengine damage.

[SV09455( T)02/95] SHO 3.4L engine

[SV09460( T)02/95] The SHO 3.4L engine has been designed tooperate using premium unleaded fuel with anoctane rating of 91 or higher. Regular unleadedfuel with an octane rating of 87 may be used ifnecessary. For optimum performance anddriveability, it is recommended that you usepremium unleaded fuel.

[SV09470( T)12/95] In some high altitude areas, “premium” fuels aresold with octane ratings of less than 91. It isrecommended that you use only those“premium” fuels with an octane rating of 91 orhigher.

%*[SV09490(ALL)08/95] Fuel quality

[SV09601(ALL)12/95] Ford approves the use of gasolines, includingthose reformulated, that contain oxygenates suchas ethanol (10% maximum) and MTBE (15%maximum). If methanol is used, the gasolineshould contain no more than 5% withcosolvents.

[SV09701(ALL)12/95] If you are experiencing starting, rough idle orhesitation problems, try a different brand of fuel.If the condition persists, see your dealer or aqualified service technician.

*[SV09800(ALL)06/95] It should not be necessary to add anyaftermarket products to your fuel tank if youcontinue to use a high-quality fuel.


268

%*[SV10185(ALL)06/95] Safety Information Relating to AutomotiveFuels


Automotive fuels can cause serious injuryor death if misused or mishandled.

*[SV10200(ALL)08/95] Gasoline and other automotive fuels areextremely flammable. Turn your vehicle off anddo not smoke while refueling your vehicle. Keepsparks and other sources of ignition away fromfuels.

[SV10205(ALL)08/95] Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal ifswallowed. Never attempt to siphon any fuelby mouth.

*[SV10210(ALL)08/95] If any fuel is swallowed, call a physician orpoison control center immediately. Do not delaycalling a physician merely because no adverseeffects are noticed at first; the toxic effects offuels may not become apparent for manyhours.

*[SV10213(ALL)08/95] If gasoline is swallowed, do not inducevomiting. If a gasoline-methanol blend isswallowed, induce vomiting under the directionof a physician or poison control center.

*[SV10215(ALL)08/95] Gasoline and gasoline blends may contain smallamounts of carcinogens, such as benzene.Long-term exposure to unleaded gasoline vaporshas caused cancer in laboratory animals.

*[SV10220(ALL)08/95] Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed throughthe skin. Be careful not to splash fuel onyourself or your clothing. If fuel is splashed onthe skin, promptly remove contaminated clothingand wash the skin thoroughly with soap andwater.


269

*[SV10225(ALL)08/95] Fuels can cause severe eye irritation and possiblyeye damage. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with largeamounts of water for 15 minutes, and seekmedical attention.

*[SV10230(ALL)08/95] If you are taking the medication “Antabuse” orother forms of disulfiram for the treatment ofalcoholism, vapor or skin contact with agasoline-methanol blend may cause the samekind of adverse reaction as drinking an alcoholicbeverage. In sensitive individuals, seriouspersonal injury or sickness could result. Consulta physician promptly if you experience anadverse reaction.

[SV10250(ALL)05/95] Fuel line service

[SV10270(ALL)11/94] Fuel injection systems operate with pressurizedfuel. The fuel lines are under pressure evenwhen the engine is off. This system should beserviced by an authorized dealer using onlyFord approved parts. Using other materials maybe hazardous or allow hydrocarbon emissionsabove the legal levels set by the FederalGovernment.

%*[SV11300(ALL)05/95] Running Out of Fuel

[SV11500(ALL)05/91] If your vehicle runs out of fuel, try to stop onlevel ground away from traffic. Add at least onegallon (four liters) of fuel to start your vehicleagain. If your vehicle is not on level ground,you may need as much as five gallons (20 liters)of fuel to start it.

*[SV11550(ALL)07/95] You may need to crank the engine several timesbefore the fuel system starts to pump fuel fromthe tank to the engine.

*[SV11575(ALL)08/95] If the engine does not start, check the fuel pumpshut-off switch and reset as required. See Fuelpump shut-off switch in the Index.


270


Never pour fuel in the throttle body orattempt to start the engine with the aircleaner removed. Doing so could result infire and personal injury.

%*[SV13505(ALL)05/95] Fuel Economy

*[SV13510(ALL)07/95] Fuel economy is an estimate of the efficiency ofyour vehicle and can be calculated as Miles PerGallon (MPG) or Liters Per 100 Kilometers(L/100K).

*[SV13515(ALL)05/95] To calculate fuel economy:

*[SV13521(ALL)06/95] 1. Fill the tank completely and record theinitial odometer reading.

*[SV13526(ALL)06/95] 2. Every time you buy fuel record theamount (in gallons or liters) purchased.

[SV13530(ALL)09/95] Keep a record for at least a month. This willgive you a more accurate estimate thanfiguring the fuel economy based on only oneor two readings.

*[SV13535(ALL)07/95] 3. After at least three to five tankfuls, fill thefuel tank and record the final odometerreading.

*[SV13537(ALL)10/95] 4. Use these equations to calculate your fueleconomy:

*[SV13538(ALL)10/95] ❑English: MPG = (total miles driven)v (gallons used)

*[SV13539(ALL)10/95] ❑Metric: L/100k = (liters used)v (100 kilometers)


271

%*[SV13540(ALL)08/95] Comparisons With EnvironmentalProtection Agency (EPA) and TransportCanada (TC) Fuel Economy Estimates

*[SV13545(ALL)05/95] EPA fuel economy figures are obtained fromlaboratory tests under simulated road conditionsand may not reflect the actual conditions youexperience or your style of driving. The EPAfuel economy estimate is not a guarantee thatyou will achieve the fuel economy shown.

%*[SV13555(ALL)08/95] Improving Fuel Economy

*[SV13561(ALL)05/95] Fuel economy is affected by a number ofvariables which can reduce efficiency. You canimprove fuel economy by understanding thesevariables and minimizing their effect.

*[SV13564(ALL)05/95] The following decrease fuel economy:

*[SV13568(ALL)05/95] ❑Lack of regular, scheduled maintenance

*[SV13572(ALL)05/95] ❑Excessive speed

*[SV13576(ALL)05/95] ❑Rapid acceleration and excessive speed

*[SV13581(ALL)05/95] ❑Driving with your foot on the brake

*[SV13584(ALL)05/95] ❑Sudden stops

*[SV13589(ALL)05/95] ❑Extended engine idling

*[SV13591(ALL)05/95] ❑Using speed control in hilly terrain

*[SV13593(ALL)05/95] ❑Extended use of the A/C, defroster, rearwindow defroster and other accessories

*[SV13596(ALL)05/95] ❑Underinflated tires

*[SV13598(ALL)05/95] ❑Heavy loads

*[SV13599(ALL)05/95] ❑Aftermarket add-ons such as bike, ski orluggage racks, bug deflectors, etc.


272

*[SV13605(ALL)02/95] Self-Service Pointers

*[SV13611(ALL)01/95] If you choose to do your own fueling, youshould also perform a few simple maintenanceroutines. This extra effort will save youadditional money and contribute to the drivingefficiency of your vehicle.

*[SV13615(ALL)01/95] The following procedures require only a tiregauge, a rag, an oil can spout and windshieldwasher fluid.

*[SV13620(ALL)01/95] ❑Check the engine oil at every refueling stop

*[SV13625(ALL)01/95] ❑Clean the windshield, outside mirrors andheadlights

*[SV13630(ALL)01/95] ❑Check windshield washer fluid

*[SV13633(ALL)02/95] ❑Check tires for excessive wear or worn edges

*[SV13636(ALL)01/95] ❑Check the tire pressure at least monthly

%*[SV13638(ALL)02/95] Engine Oil Recommendations

*[SV13639(ALL)09/95] We recommend using Motorcraft oil or anequivalent oil meeting Ford SpecificationWSS-M2C153-F and displaying the AmericanPetroleum Institute CERTIFICATION MARK onthe front of the container.

*[SV13650(ALL)03/95]


The API Certification Mark


273

*[SV13670(ALL)01/95] Never use:

*[SV13680(ALL)01/95] ❑“Non-Detergent” oils

*[SV13690(ALL)04/95] ❑Oils labeled API SA, SB, SC, SD, SE, SF or SG

%*[SV13700(ALL)01/95] ❑Additional engine oil additives, oil treatmentsor engine treatments

% [SV13710(ALL)02/95] Engine oils with an SAE 5W-30 viscosity arePREFERRED for your vehicle. They provide thebest engine performance, fuel economy andengine protection for all climates down to -15˚F(-25˚C).

%*[SV13770(ALL)03/95] Synthetic engine oils which are CERTIFIED andof the preferred viscosity may be used in yourengine. The engine oil and oil filter must still bechanged according to the maintenance schedule.

%*[SV13775(ALL)01/95] Checking and Adding Engine Oil

*[SV13800(ALL)03/95] Since the proper amount of engine oil isimportant for safe engine operation, check the oilusing the dipstick each time you put fuel inyour vehicle. Remember the engine must be off,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beparked on level ground.

%*[SV13900(ALL)04/95] Checking the engine oil level:

*[SV14000(ALL)02/95] 1. Turn the engine off after it has warmed upand allow a few minutes for the engine oilto drain back into the oil pan.

*[SV14025(ALL)03/95] 2. Set the parking brake, making sure thegearshift is securely latched in P (Park).

*[SV14100(ALL)02/95] 3. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engineheat.

*[SV14200(ALL)03/95] 4. Locate the engine oil dipstick (highlighted inyellow) and carefully pull it out of theengine.


274

*[SV14300(ALL)01/95] 5. Wipe the dipstick clean and put it back intoposition, making sure it is fully seated.

[SV14400(ALL)02/95]


Engine oil dipstick (3.0L Vulcan)

[SV14450( T)02/95]


Engine oil dipstick (3.0L Duratec and 3.4L SHO)

*[SV14500(ALL)11/95] 6. Carefully, pull the dipstick out again. If theoil level is below the “ADD 1 QT” line, addengine oil as necessary. If the oil level isbeyond the letter “F” in Full, engine damageor high oil consumption may occur andsome oil must be removed from the engine.

*[SV14600(ALL)01/95] 7. Put the dipstick back in and make sure it isfully seated.

%*[SV14700(ALL)03/95] Adding engine oil

*[SV14800(ALL)01/95] It may be necessary to add some oil between oilchanges. Make sure you use a CERTIFIEDengine oil of the preferred viscosity. Yourvehicle’s warranty coverage may not apply ifengine damage is caused by the use of improperengine oil.

*[SV15000(ALL)03/95] Add engine oil through the oil filler caphighlighted in yellow. To add oil, remove thefiller cap and use a funnel to pour oil into theopening. Be careful not to overfill the engine.Recheck the oil level after you finish adding oil.


275

%*[SV16300(ALL)06/95] Changing the Engine Oil and the Oil Filter

*[SV16400(ALL)04/95] Change the engine oil and oil filter per thefollowing, whichever occurs first.

[SV16500(ALL)04/95]


*[SV16550(ALL)03/95] Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and RecordBooklet for additional information.



Continuous contact with USED motor oilhas caused cancer in laboratory mice.

[SV16800(ALL)07/95] Protect your skin by washing with mild soapand water.


276

%*[SV17300(ALL)03/95] Engine Coolant%*[SV17320(ALL)09/95] Checking the Engine Coolant

*[SV17350(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Be sure to read and understandPrecautions When Servicing YourVehicle at the beginning of this chapter.


The cooling fans are automatic and maycome on at any time. Always disconnectthe negative terminal of the battery beforeworking near the fan.

%*[SV17600(ALL)05/94] Your vehicle’s coolant protects your engine fromoverheating in the summer and from freezing inthe winter. Check the level of the coolant at leastonce a month. Simply look at the engine coolantreservoir located in the engine compartment. Tolocate the reservoir, see the diagram of yourvehicle’s engine under Engine Type, in thischapter.

*[SV17650(ALL)05/95] The coolant additives also protect the entirecooling system from internal passagewaycorrosion and these additives lubricate the waterpump. The coolant should be serviced as notedin the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet.


277

[SV17700(ALL)12/95]


The engine coolant reservoir (3.0L Vulcan shown — 3.0LDuratec and 3.4L SHO similar)

[SV17750(ALL)04/95] The coolant level in the reservoir should bemaintained within the cold fill range.

[SV17900(ALL)02/95] There may be a low coolant warning light in theinstrument cluster which will light when thecoolant level is low.

%*[SV18000(ALL)08/95] Checking Hoses

*[SV18050(ALL)11/94] Inspect all engine and heater system hoses andhose connections for deterioration, leaks, andloose hose clamps as specified in the MaintenanceSchedule and Record booklet. Repair or replacewith Motorcraft hoses or equivalent as necessary.

*[SV18100(ALL)09/95] Adding Engine Coolant


Do not put engine coolant in the containerfor the windshield washer fluid.

*[SV18250(ALL)09/95] If sprayed to clean the glass, engine coolant orantifreeze could make it difficult to see throughthe windshield.


278


Never remove the pressure cap while theengine is running or hot to avoid personalinjury that can be caused by escapingsteam or engine coolant.

[SV18500(ALL)04/95] 1. Before you remove the cap, turn the engineoff and let it cool. Even when the engine iscool, be careful when you remove the cap.

[SV18600(ALL)02/95] 2. When the engine is cold, wrap a thick clotharound the cap and turn it slowlycounterclockwise to relieve pressure.

*[SV18700(ALL)09/95] 3. Step back while the pressure releases.

*[SV18800(ALL)09/95] 4. When you are sure that all the pressure hasbeen released, use the cloth to turn andremove cap.

*[SV18900(ALL)02/95] 5. Stand away from the reservoir opening. Hotsteam may blow out or hot engine coolantmay even splash out.


Failure to follow these instructions couldresult in serious personal injury from hotengine coolant or steam blowout and/ordamage to the engine cooling system orengine.

*[SV19050(ALL)09/95] To find out how much engine coolant mixtureyour vehicle’s coolant system can hold, see Refillcapacities for fluids in the Index.

[SV19100(ALL)04/95] Add engine coolant only to the coolantreservoir. If the coolant level is low, add to thereservoir a 50/50 mixture of water and the typeof engine coolant that Ford specifies. You mayadd water by itself only in an emergency, butyou should replace it with a 50/50 mixture assoon as possible.


279

[SV19104(ALL)04/95] Ford Premium Cooling System Fluid is anoptimized formula that will protect all metal andrubber elastomers used in Ford engines for fouryears or 50,000 miles (80,000 km). It is notnecessary and not recommended to usesupplemental coolant additives in your vehicle.These additives may harm your engine coolingsystem. Follow the recommended service intervalfor changing your engine coolant.

*[SV19106(ALL)09/95] NOTE: When you change or add enginecoolant, it is important to maintainyour engine coolant concentrationbetween 40% (-11˚F [-24˚C]) and 60%(-62˚F [-52˚C]), depending on your localclimate conditions. Below 40% you willlose freeze protection and above 60%your engine may overheat on a warmday.

*[SV19107(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Less than 40% of coolant concentrationmay cause engine corrosion andoverheating. Plain water may be usedin an emergency only. Replace it withthe specified coolant as quickly aspossible.

*[SV19108(ALL)09/95] NOTE: The use of an improper coolant mayvoid your warranty for the enginecooling system. Use only a premium,nationally recognized brand nameengine coolant. Do not use alcohol,methanol antifreeze or engine coolantmixed with alcohol or methanolantifreeze. If you do not use the propercoolant, the aluminum engine on yourvehicle will corrode.


280

*[SV19110(ALL)09/95] Ford Motor Company expressly authorizes theFord Rotunda engine coolant recycling processand chemicals. Use only Ford Rotunda recycledengine coolant or an equivalent recycled enginecoolant that is certified by the supplier to meetFord specification ESE-M97B44-A.


*[SV19115(ALL)09/95] Use Ford Premium Cooling System FluidE2FZ-19549-AA (in Canada, Motorcraft CXC-8-B)or an equivalent engine coolant that meets FordSpecification ESE-M97B44-A.

[SV19150(ALL)11/94] Have your dealer check the engine coolingsystem for leaks if:

[SV19200(ALL)11/94] ❑you have to add engine coolant more thanonce a month, or

[SV19250(ALL)11/94] ❑you have to add more than a quart (liter) at atime

%*[SV19300(ALL)08/95] Engine Coolant Drain and Flush

*[SV19350(ALL)11/94] Proper procedures for a complete coolant drainand flush of the cooling system can be found inthe Car Service Manual. Following theserecommended procedures will ensure that thespecified coolant level and a 50/50 orappropriate mixture of coolant and water ismaintained.


281

*[SV19400(ALL)08/95] Engine Coolant Refill Procedure

*[SV19450(ALL)01/95] When the entire cooling system is drained andrefilled, the following procedure should be usedto ensure a complete fill:

[SV19500(ALL)04/95] ❑With the engine OFF and cool, remove thepressure cap, located on the coolant reservoir.

[SV19550(ALL)04/95] ❑Add a 50/50 mixture of specified coolant andwater to the coolant reservoir. Refer to RefillCapacities later in this chapter for the correctamount.

[SV19600(ALL)02/95] ❑Continue to fill the reservoir until the coolantis at the top of the cold fill range.

[SV19650(ALL)04/95] ❑Reinstall the pressure cap until it clicks.

*[SV19700(ALL)05/95] ❑Start and idle the engine until the radiatorupper hose is warm (this indicates thethermostat is open and coolant is flowingthrough the entire system).

[SV19750(ALL)04/95] ❑ Immediately shut off the engine and let cool.Cautiously remove the pressure cap and adda 50/50 mixture of specified coolant andwater until the coolant is within the cold fillrange in the coolant reservoir.

[SV19800(ALL)02/95] ❑Reinstall the pressure cap until a click isheard and felt.

*[SV19850(ALL)03/95] ❑Check for leaks at the draincock.

*[SV19900(ALL)03/95] ❑Recheck the engine coolant level, using therecommended procedure, after one or twooccasions of vehicle use.


282

% [SV19950(ALL)04/95] About Your Battery

*[SV20001(ALL)02/95] Your vehicle may have a Motorcraftmaintenance-free battery. When the originalequipment battery is replaced under warranty, itmay be replaced by a MotorcraftLow-Maintenance Battery.

% [SV20850(ALL)04/95] Because your vehicle’s engine is electronicallycontrolled by a computer, some controlconditions are maintained by power from thebattery. If you ever disconnect the battery orinstall a new battery, you must allow thecomputer to “relearn” its idle conditions beforeyour vehicle will drive properly. To begin thisprocess, put the gearshift in P (Park), set theparking brake, turn off all the accessories, andstart the vehicle. Bring the engine to normaloperating temperature. Allow the engine to idlefor one minute in N (Neutral) and one minute inDrive or Overdrive. Perform the previousprocedure with the air conditioning on and off(conditions permitting). The relearning processwill complete automatically as you drive thevehicle.

[SV20875(ALL)10/95] Driveability may be deteriorated slightly until alldrive modes are “relearned.”

*[SV21000(ALL)03/95] If you do not let the engine relearn its idle, theidle quality of your vehicle may be adverselyaffected until the idle is relearned. Your vehiclewill eventually relearn its idle while you driveit, but it takes much longer than if you use theprevious procedure.


283

%*[SV21100(ALL)03/95] Help Us Protect Our Environment

*[SV21200(ALL)04/95] Ford Motor Company strongly recommends thatused lead-acid batteries be returned to anauthorized recycling facility for disposal.

*[SV21300(ALL)03/95]


Battery recycling symbol

%*[SV21700(ALL)03/95] Windshield Washer Fluid andWipers

%*[SV21800(ALL)03/95] Washer Fluid

[SV21900(ALL)11/94] Check the level of the windshield washer fluidevery time you stop for fuel. The reservoir forwasher fluid is located on the passenger’s side ofthe engine compartment and is highlighted witha washer symbol.

[SV22205(ALL)11/94]


The windshield washer fluid reservoir


284


Do not put windshield washer fluid in thecontainer for the engine coolant.

%*[SV22500(ALL)01/95] Use specially formulated windshield washerfluid rather than plain water, because speciallyformulated washer fluids contain additives thatdissolve road grime. For safety reasons, washerfluids containing an appropriate antifreeze suchas methanol should be used in freezing weather(temperatures below 32˚F [0˚C]). State or localregulations on Volatile Organic Compounds(VOC’s) may restrict use of the most commonantifreeze, methanol. Washer fluids containingnon-methanol antifreeze agents should be usedonly if they provide cold weather protectionwithout damaging the vehicle’s paint finish,wiper blades, and windshield washer system.


Washer solution contains methanol whichis poisonous. Observe all warningsindicated on label of washer solution.

% [SV22600(ALL)06/94] Checking the washer fluid for theliftgate (If equipped)

[SV23100(ALL)04/95] If your wagon has a rear window wiper, checkthe reservoir for its washer fluid regularly. Thisis not the same reservoir that your windshieldwipers use. The opening for this reservoir is onthe right side of the liftgate opening, below thetail lamp. Refill this reservoir with the samesolution you use for your windshield. To findout how much washer fluid the reservoir holds,see Refill Capacities later in this chapter.


285

%*[SV23200(ALL)03/95] Wiper Blades

*[SV23300(ALL)03/95] Check the windshield wiper blades at least twicea year. Also check them whenever they seemless effective than usual. Substances such as treesap and some hot wax treatments used bycommercial car washes reduce the effectivenessof wiper blades.

*[SV23400(ALL)09/95] If the blades do not wipe properly, clean boththe windshield and the wiper blades. Useundiluted windshield washer solution or a milddetergent. Rinse thoroughly with clear water. Donot use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner, or othersolvents to clean your wiper blades. These willdamage your blades.

*[SV23500(ALL)03/95] To make reaching the wiper blades easy, simplyturn the ignition to the ACC position and turnyour wipers on. Wait for them to reach avertical position and turn the ignition to the OFFposition. Do not move the wipers manually.Manually moving the wipers across thewindshield may damage them.

*[SV23600(ALL)03/01] Wiper blade replacement

*[SV23700(ALL)09/95] If the wiper blades still do not work properlyafter you clean them, you may need to replacethe wiper blade assembly or the blade element.When replacing the wiper blade assembly, bladerefill, or wiper arm always use a Motorcraft partor equivalent. To replace the blades, follow theinstructions that come with them.

[SV23705(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle uses a 24" wiper on the driver sideand a 20" wiper on the passenger side.


286

% [SV23716(ALL)04/95] MicronAirH Air FilterReplacement

*[SV23719(ALL)04/95] In your climate control system, you may have afilter that cleans the air before it enters theinterior of the vehicle. This filter should bereplaced at the intervals in the MaintenanceSchedule and Record booklet.

[SV23723(ALL)04/95] To replace the MicronAirH air filter:

[SV23725(ALL)04/95] 1. Open the hood. Move the vacuum hose atthe rear passenger side of the enginecompartment by pulling the hose clips offthe leaf screen and removing the loose clip.With a coin or screwdriver, turn the fourretainers on the leaf screen 90˚ and pullthem straight out. Remove the leaf screen.

[SV23730(ALL)04/95]


Removing the vacuum hose clips


287

[SV23735(ALL)04/95]


Removing the leaf screen

[SV23740(ALL)04/95] 2. With a wrench or socket, remove the twoscrews that hold the water shield. Move thewater shield toward the center of the vehicleuntil there is enough clearance to remove it.

[SV23745(ALL)04/95]


Removing the water shield

[SV23750(ALL)04/95] 3. Remove the old filter by sliding it forwardout of the plastic tray then towards thecenter of the vehicle until there is enoughclearance to remove it.

[SV23755(ALL)04/95] 4. Install the new filter by compressing it andsliding it into the plastic tray. Push the leftrear corner back and down to seat it in thetray. Push the other edges of the filter downto seat the filter completely.


288

[SV23760(ALL)04/95]


Installing the new filter

[SV23765(ALL)04/95] 5. Reinstall the water shield, sliding it from thecenter of the vehicle toward the fender. Asyou position it over the filter, guide thehinged flap on the left side of the shielddown between the filter and the fender.Slide the shield toward the fender until theholes on the shield align with the holes onthe vehicle body. Reinstall the two screwsthat hold the shield in place.

[SV23770(ALL)04/95] 6. Reinstall the leaf screen. Tuck the left rearcorner of the screen under the top of thefender, then lower the screen into position.Reinstall the four retainers, turning them 90˚to lock them into place. Reinstall the vacuumline hose clips and the one loose clip in thenotches in the leaf screen.

%*[SV23800(ALL)03/95] Tires*[SV23900(ALL)03/95] Look at your tires each time you fill your fuel

tank. If one tire looks lower than the others,check the pressure in all of them. Always followthese precautions:

*[SV24200(ALL)03/95] ❑Keep your tires inflated to the recommendedpressures.

*[SV24300(ALL)02/95] ❑Stay within the recommended load limits (seeLoad limits in the Index).


289

*[SV24500(ALL)02/95] ❑Make sure the weight of your load is evenlydistributed.

*[SV24550(ALL)10/89] ❑Drive at safe speeds.

*[SV24700(ALL)01/95] If you do not take these precautions, your tiresmay fail or go flat.


Driving too fast for conditions creates thepossibility of loss of vehicle control.Driving at very high speeds for extendedperiods of time may result in damage tovehicle components.

% [SV24850(ALL)04/95] At least once a month, check the pressure in allyour vehicle’s tires, including the spare. Use anaccurate tire pressure gauge. Check the tirepressure when tires are cold, after the vehiclehas been parked for at least one hour or hasbeen driven less than 3 miles (5 km). You canfind the proper cold pressure and load limits ofrecommended size tires on the Tire PressureDecal inside the glove compartment.


Improperly inflated tires can affect vehiclehandling and can fail suddenly, possiblyresulting in loss of vehicle control.


290

% [SV24925(ALL)04/95] Consistent high-speed driving

*[SV24930(ALL)07/95] Ford Motor Company recommends obeyingposted speed limits.


Driving too fast for conditions creates thepossibility of loss of vehicle control.Driving at very high speeds for extendedperiods of time may result in damage tovehicle components.

[SV24975(ALL)02/95] In the event of continuous operation at highspeed, the cold air pressure in all tires must beincreased by 4 p.s.i. (28 kpa) when compared tothe inflation pressure shown on the tire decalposted in the glove compartment. Under nocircumstances should you exceed maximum tireinflation pressure which is molded on the tireouter side wall.

[SV25025(ALL)02/95] Your vehicle has been equipped with properspeed rated tires to meet its speed capabilities.For further details, consult your Tire WarrantyBooklet provided with the vehicle in the glovecompartment.

%*[SV25100(ALL)02/95] Tire Rotation

[SV25200(ALL)11/94] Because your vehicle’s front and rear tiresperform different jobs, they often weardifferently. To make sure your tires wear evenlyand last longer, rotate them as indicated in theMaintenance Schedule and Record booklet.

[SV25300(ALL)11/94] Rotate the tires according to the followingdiagram. Do not include the spare tire as part ofyour rotation. If you notice that the tires wearunevenly, have them checked.


291

[SV25410(ALL)11/94]


Rotating the tires

%*[SV25700(ALL)04/95] Replacing the Tires

[SV25800(ALL)01/89] We recommend that you use all-weather tireswhen you replace your tires.

[SV25850( T)12/95] SHO models must use a P225/55VR16 tire forreplacement.

*[SV25900(ALL)05/95] Replace any tires that show wear bands. Whenyour tire shows a wear band, it has only 1/16inch (2 mm) of tread left.

[SV26150(ALL)05/94]


A worn-out tire

*[SV26175(ALL)01/95] Because your vehicle’s tires may wear unevenly,you may need to replace them before a wearband appears across the entire tread. Some spotswear more heavily than others.


292


When replacing full size tires, never mixradial, bias-belted, or bias-type tires. Useonly the tire sizes that are listed on thetire pressure decal. Make sure that all tiresare the same size, speed rating, andload-carrying capacity. Use only the tirecombinations recommended on the decal.If you do not follow these precautions,your vehicle may not drive properly andsafely.

*[SV26400(ALL)01/95] Tires that are larger or smaller than yourvehicle’s original tires may also affect theaccuracy of your speedometer.

%*[SV27400(ALL)02/95] Information About Tire Quality Grades

*[SV27500(ALL)01/95] New vehicles are fitted with tires that have theirTire Quality Grade (described below) moldedinto the tire’s sidewall. These Tire QualityGrades are determined by standards that theUnited States Department of Transportation hasset.

*[SV27550(ALL)01/95] Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatictires for use on passenger cars. They do notapply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tireswith nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches orlimited production tires as defined in Title 49Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).

*[SV27600(ALL)01/95] U.S. Department of Transportation — Tirequality grades: The U.S. Department ofTransportation requires Ford to give you thefollowing information about tire grades exactlyas the government has written it.


293

%*[SV27799(ALL)01/95] Treadwear

*[SV27800(ALL)01/95] The treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2)times as well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly from thenorm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

*[SV27999(ALL)01/95] Traction A B C

*[SV28000(ALL)01/95] The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areA, B, and C, and they represent the tire’s abilityto stop on wet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor traction performance.Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on braking (straightahead) traction testsand does not include cornering (turning)traction.

*[SV28299(ALL)01/95] Temperature A B C

*[SV28300(ALL)01/95] The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions ona specified indoor laboratory test wheel.Sustained high temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tirelife, and excessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds toa level of performance which all passenger cartires must meet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A


294

represent higher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: The temperaturegrade for this tire is established for a tire that isproperly inflated and not overloaded. Excessivespeed, underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

%*[SV28500(ALL)04/95] Snow Tires and Chains

*[SV28600(ALL)01/95] The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treadsthat provide traction in rain or snow. However,during the winter months in some climates, youmay need to use snow tires and occasionallychains for your tires.


Snow tires must be the same size andgrade as the tires you currently have onyour vehicle.

*[SV28775(ALL)02/95] Use chains on the tires only in an emergency orif the law requires them where you live. If youchoose to use chains on your vehicle’s tires, beaware of the following:

*[SV28825(ALL)08/93] ❑Tire chains may scratch or chip aluminumwheels. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT TIRECHAINS ARE INSTALLED ON STEELWHEELS ONLY. Be sure to remove wheelcovers (if equipped) from steel rims beforeusing tire chains to avoid scratches ordamage.

[SV28850( T)12/95] ❑Do not use tire chains if your vehicle isequipped with P225/55VR16 tires (SHO only).

*[SV28925(ALL)11/94] ❑Local regulations may prohibit or restrict theuse of tire chains. Investigate the laws andregulations in your area before installingchains.


295

*[SV28950(ALL)05/95] ❑Put the chains on the front tires tightly withthe ends held down securely. Retighten thechains after driving 1/2 mile (1 km). Followthe chain manufacturer’s instructions.

*[SV28975(ALL)05/95] ❑Do not drive faster than 30 mph (50 km/h)or the chain manufacturer’s recommendedspeed limit, whichever is lower. Avoidbumps, holes and sharp turns. If you canhear the chains rub or bang against yourvehicle, remove the chains to prevent damageto your vehicle.

*[SV29025(ALL)11/94] ❑Tire chains may affect vehicle handling. Drivecarefully and avoid hard braking.

*[SV29050(ALL)11/94] ❑Do not use chains on temporary spare tires.They may damage the vehicle and the tire.

*[SV29150(ALL)05/94] ❑Remove tire chains at the first opportunityafter using them on snow and ice. Do not usethe chains on dry roads.

%*[SV29160(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Wheels

*[SV29170(ALL)05/95] Wash the wheels with the same detergent youuse to wash your vehicle’s body. Do not useacid-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, abrasives,fuel, or strong detergents. These substances willdamage protective coatings. Use tar and road oilremover to remove grease and tar.

*[SV29180(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Before going to a car wash, find out ifthe brushes are abrasive.


296

*[SV29220(ALL)04/95] Air Filter% [SV29240(ALL)02/95] To replace the engine air filter, unclip the two

latches, separate the housing and remove the oldfilter. Wipe the interior of the housing cleanbefore inserting the new filter. Lock the twolatches.

[SV29260(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Do not use oil-impregnated air filters.Filters other than the ones specified inthis Owner Guide can cause enginedamage. Your warranties may notapply if your vehicle is damagedbecause you used the wrong air filter.See Motorcraft parts in the Index.

%*[SV29300(ALL)05/95] Automatic Transaxle Fluid

*[SV29310(ALL)03/95] Under normal circumstances, you do not need tocheck the fluid level of the transaxle, since yourvehicle does not use up transaxle fluid. Refer tothe Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet forreplacement intervals. However, if the transaxleis not working properly — for instance, thetransaxle may slip or shift slowly, or you maynotice some sign of fluid leakage — the fluidlevel should be checked.

%*[SV29340(ALL)02/93] Checking the Automatic Transaxle Fluid

*[SV29350(ALL)02/95] With the vehicle on a level surface and the brakepedal fully applied, start the engine and movethe gearshift selector through all of the gears.Allow sufficient time for each position to engage.Securely latch the gearshift selector in the P(Park) position. Fully set the parking brake andleave the engine running.

*[SV29370(ALL)01/95] Wipe off the dipstick cap and pull the dipstickout. Wipe the indicator end clean. Put thedipstick back into the filler tube and make sureit is fully seated. Pull the dipstick out and readthe fluid level.


297

[SV29380(ALL)04/95]


Automatic overdrive transaxle fluid dipstick

[SV29388(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Your vehicle should not be driven untilsome fluid has been added if the fluidlevel is below the bottom hole on thedipstick and the outside temperature isabove 50˚F (10˚C). Add only enoughfluid to bring the level above thebottom hole.

[SV29395(ALL)04/95] If the vehicle has not been driven and the fluidlevel is above the bottom hole on the dipstick,do not add fluid. Recheck the fluid level afteryour vehicle has reached normal operatingtemperature.

*[SV29396(ALL)05/95] Normal operating temperature is reached afterdriving approximately 20 miles (30 km). Thefluid level should be within the crosshatchedarea on the dipstick.

*[SV29397(ALL)01/95] NOTE: If the vehicle has been operated for anextended period at high speeds, drivenin city traffic during hot weather, orhas been pulling a trailer, the vehicleshould be turned off for about 30minutes to allow the fluid to coolbefore checking.


298

%*[SV29400(ALL)01/95] Adding Automatic Transaxle Fluid

*[SV29410(ALL)01/95] Before adding any fluid, be sure that the correcttype will be used. Correct type is shown on thedipstick.

[SV29415(ALL)04/93] Add fluid in 1/2 pint (.25L) increments throughthe filler tube to bring the level within thecrosshatched area on the dipstick. If the level isabove the top hole on the dipstick, excess fluidshould be removed by a qualified technician.


%*[SV30200(ALL)03/95] Brake Fluid

*[SV30300(ALL)04/95] Under normal circumstances, your vehicleshould not use up brake fluid rapidly. However,expect the level of the brake fluid to slowly fallas you put more mileage on your vehicle andthe brake lining wears.

%*[SV30400(ALL)06/93] You should check the brake fluid at everyscheduled engine oil change, but be sure tocheck it at least once a year. You can do this bylooking at the fluid level in the plastic reservoiron the master cylinder. (See The Engine Types inthis chapter to locate the master cylinder.) Thefluid level should be at or near the MAX mark.


Brake fluid is toxic.


299

*[SV30475(ALL)07/95] If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes withrunning water for 15 minutes. Get medicalattention if irritation persists. If taken internally,drink water and induce vomiting. Get medicalattention immediately.

*[SV30500(ALL)10/95] If the fluid is low, carefully clean and removethe cap from the reservoir. Fill the reservoir tothe MAX line with Ford High Performance DOT3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalentDOT 3 fluid meeting Ford specificationESA-M6C25-A.


If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT3, you will cause permanent damage toyour brakes.

*[SV30900(ALL)01/95] Do not fill the reservoir above the MAX line.

*[SV31000(ALL)01/95] If you find that the fluid level is excessively low— below the seam or ridge on the outside of theplastic reservoir — have the brake systeminspected.


Do not let the reservoir for the mastercylinder run dry. This may cause thebrakes to fail.


300

[SV31140(ALL)11/94]


The brake fluid reservoir

%*[SV31200(ALL)03/95] Power Steering Fluid

*[SV31300(ALL)01/95] Check the level of the power steering fluid atleast twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall).

%*[SV31400(ALL)03/95] Checking and Adding Power SteeringFluid

*[SV31500(ALL)02/95] 1. Start the engine and let it run until thepower steering fluid reaches normaloperating temperature. The power steeringfluid will be at the right temperature whenthe engine coolant temperature gauge in theinstrument cluster is near the center of theNORMAL operating temperature range.

*[SV31600(ALL)01/95] 2. While the engine idles, turn the steeringwheel back and forth several times. Makesure that the cap assembly is installed at thistime.

*[SV31700(ALL)05/95] 3. Turn the engine off.


301

[SV31800(ALL)04/95] 3.0L Vulcan engine:

%*[SV31900(ALL)03/94] 4. Check the fluid level on the dipstick (whichis highlighted in yellow in your vehicle). Thefluid level should be between the arrows inthe FULL HOT range, which is marked onthe side of the dipstick, opposite the sidemarked FULL COLD. Do not add fluid if thelevel is within the FULL HOT range.

*[SV32100(ALL)07/94] 5. If the power steering fluid is low, add fluidin small amounts, continuously checking thelevel, until you reach the FULL HOT range.Do not overfill.

[SV32150(ALL)02/95]


Dipstick for power steering fluid (3.0L Vulcan)

*[SV32175(ALL)03/95] 6. When you are finished, put the dipstick backin and make sure that it fits snugly.


302

[SV32200( T)02/95] 3.0L Duratec and 3.4L SHO:

*[SV32250(ALL)11/94] 4. Check the fluid level in the power steeringfluid reservoir. The fluid level should bebetween the MIN and MAX lines on the sideof the reservoir.

*[SV32300(ALL)11/94] 5. If the power steering fluid is below the MINmark, add fluid in small amounts until thelevel is between the MIN and MAX lines onthe side of the reservoir.

[SV32350( T)02/95]


Reservoir for power steering fluid (3.0L Duratec and 3.4LSHO)

[SV32400(ALL)04/95] Use only MerconH ATF power steering fluid.

*[SV32700(ALL)01/95] If the power steering fluid is low, do not driveyour vehicle for a long period of time beforeadding fluid. This can damage the powersteering pump.


303

[SV32900( T)02/95] If you check the power steering fluid when it iscold, make sure that the fluid reaches the FULLCOLD range on the dipstick (3.0L Vulcan) orMIN on the reservoir (3.0L Duratec or 3.4LSHO). The reading will only be accurate if thefluid temperature is approximately 50 to 85˚F (10to 30˚C).

% [SV32910(ALL)02/95] Fuses and Relays[SV32915(ALL)04/95] Fuses (conventional and high current) and relays

protect your vehicle’s wiring system fromoverloading. If electrical parts in your vehicle arenot working, the system may have beenoverloaded and blown a fuse. Before you replaceor repair any electrical parts, check theappropriate circuit protector. High current fusesshould only be repaired or replaced by yourFord or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.

[SV33400(ALL)02/95] The following charts tell you which circuitprotector protects each electrical part of yourvehicle. If a fuse blows, all the parts of yourvehicle that use the circuit will not work.

*[SV33410(ALL)05/95] Once you have determined which fuses to check,follow the procedures under Checking andreplacing fuses later in this chapter.


Always remove the key from the ignitionbefore working on or replacing fuses.


304

% [SV33600(ALL)11/94] The instrument panel fuses and relays

[SV33935(ALL)11/94]


The instrument panel fuse panel location


305

[SV33940(ALL)12/95]

full page art:0001082-E

The instrument panel fuse cover


306

[SV33950(ALL)12/95]

thirty-six pica chart:0001084-F


307

% [SV33960(ALL)12/95]

thirty-four pica chart:0001086-E


308

% [SV33975(ALL)11/94] The power distribution box fuses and relays

*[SV33983(ALL)07/95] Ford recommends that high current fuses bereplaced by a qualified technician.


Always disconnect the battery beforeservicing high current fuses.

[SV33986(ALL)11/94]


The power distribution box location


309

[SV33990(ALL)12/95]

full page art:0001090-B

The power distribution box


310

[SV33995( T)12/95]

thirty-two pica chart:0001091-E


311

%*[SV35200(ALL)06/95] Checking and Replacing Fuses

*[SV35300(ALL)02/95] If you need to check a fuse, follow these steps:

[SV35400(ALL)11/94] 1. Lift the handle of the fuse panel or powerdistribution box to unlatch the cover.

[SV35600(ALL)11/94] 2. On the cover, find the fuse you want tocheck. The diagram on the cover tells youwhere to locate the fuse on the panel.

[SV35900(ALL)11/94] 3. Check the fuse to see if it is blown. Toremove the fuse, use the pulling toolattached to the inside cover of the fusepanel. Look through the clear side of thefuse to see if the metal wire inside isseparated. If it is, the fuse should bereplaced.

*[SV36000(ALL)10/95]


Fuse puller tool and fuse

*[SV36100(ALL)11/94] 4. Replace the fuse with one that has the rightamperage rating. (See the following chart.)

[SV36200(ALL)04/95]

six pica chart:0001443-A


312

[SV36250(ALL)04/95]

fourteen pica chart:0001468-A


Always replace a fuse with one that hasthe specified amperage rating. Using afuse with a higher amperage rating cancause severe wire damage and could starta fire.

[SV36400(ALL)11/94] 5. Put the cover back on.

*[SV36600(ALL)01/95] Even after you replace a fuse, it will continue toblow if you do not find what caused theoverload. If the fuse continues to blow, haveyour electrical system checked.

*[SV37500(ALL)03/95] The Lights

*[SV37600(ALL)01/95] It is a good idea to check the operation of thefollowing lights frequently:

*[SV37700(ALL)01/95] ❑headlamps

*[SV37800(ALL)01/95] ❑ tail lamps

*[SV37900(ALL)01/95] ❑brakelamps

*[SV37950(ALL)02/95] ❑high-mount brakelamp


313

*[SV38000(ALL)01/95] ❑hazard flasher

*[SV38100(ALL)01/95] ❑ turn signals

*[SV38200(ALL)01/95] ❑ side markers

*[SV38300(ALL)01/95] ❑ license plate lamp

%*[SV38400(ALL)01/95] The alignment of your headlamps should bechecked if:

*[SV38500(ALL)01/95] ❑oncoming motorists frequently signal you toturn off your vehicle’s high beams when youdo not have the high beams on

*[SV38600(ALL)01/95] ❑ the headlamps do not seem to give youenough light to see clearly at night

*[SV38700(ALL)11/92] ❑ the headlamps are not aligned so that theypoint slightly down and to the right.

%*[SV38800(ALL)03/95] Replacing the Headlamp Bulb

*[SV38900(ALL)01/95] The headlamps on your vehicle use replaceablebulbs. When the lamp burns out, simply replacethe bulb, rather than the whole lamp.


Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefullyand keep out of children’s reach. Graspthe bulb only by its plastic base and donot touch the glass. The oil from yourhand could cause the bulb to break thenext time the headlamps are operated.

*[SV39100(ALL)01/95] Do not remove the burned-out bulb unless youcan immediately replace it with a new one. If abulb is removed for an extended period of time,contaminants may enter the headlamp housingand affect its performance.


314

[SV39250(ALL)11/92]


Parts of a headlamp

*[SV39300(ALL)03/95] To remove the headlamp bulb:

*[SV39350(ALL)05/95] 1. Make sure that the headlamp knob is in theOFF position.

[SV39401(ALL)04/95] 2. Lift the hood. If you are replacing thedriver’s side headlamp, unclip the electronicmodule on the right side of the battery andmove it out of the way. Find the bulb in theheadlamp socket.

[SV39425(ALL)04/95]


The module behind the driver’s side headlamp

*[SV39450(ALL)02/95] 3. Remove the electrical connector from thebulb by pulling the connector.


315

*[SV39501(ALL)02/95] 4. Remove the bulb retaining ring by rotating itcounterclockwise (when viewed from therear) about an eighth of a turn to free itfrom the bulb socket, and by sliding the ringoff the plastic base. Keep the ring. It is to beused again to retain the new bulb.

[SV39550(ALL)02/95] 5. Carefully remove the bulb from its socket bygently pulling it straight back out of thesocket. Do not turn the bulb while youremove it.

*[SV39601(ALL)03/95] To install a bulb:

*[SV39650(ALL)02/95] 1. With the flat side of the bulb’s plastic basefacing upward, insert the glass end of thebulb into the socket. You may need to turnthe bulb left or right to line up the groovesin the plastic base with the tabs in thesocket. When the grooves are aligned, pushthe bulb into the socket until the plastic basecontacts the rear of the socket.

*[SV39701(ALL)08/95] 2. Slip the bulb retaining ring over the plasticbase until it contacts the rear of the socket.Lock the ring into the socket by rotating itclockwise until you feel a “stop.”

*[SV39750(ALL)02/95] 3. Push the electrical connector into the rear ofthe plastic base until it snaps, locking it intoposition.

*[SV39800(ALL)02/95] 4. Turn the headlamps on and make sure thatthey work properly. If the headlamp wascorrectly aligned before you changed thebulb, you should not need to align it again.


316

%*[SV39850(ALL)02/95] Aiming Headlamps

[SV39901(ALL)02/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a VehicleHeadlamp Aim Device (VHAD) on theheadlamp reflector extension and headlamphousing. Each headlamp may be properly aimedin the horizontal direction (left/right) and thevertical direction (up/down) by performing thesteps outlined in the following paragraphs. Thehorizontal aim must be adjusted first.

[SV39950(ALL)06/95] Tools required: One 4mm box wrench or openend wrench.

[SV40050(ALL)04/95] Position the vehicle on a surface that is level onthe front-to-rear direction.

[SV40075(ALL)04/95] If the vehicle cannot be placed on a true levelsurface, the headlamps still can be adjustedusing the VHAD if the slope of the surface isaccurately known and does not differ by morethan 1.2˚ from true level. A difference of 2.27inches in height of the surface between the frontand rear wheels corresponds to 1.2˚ slope.

[SV40100(ALL)04/95] If the vertical adjuster is within +/s 4graduations about zero, the vertical headlampaim is within specification; and if the horizontaladjuster is within +/s 2 graduations about zero,the horizontal headlamp aim is withinspecification.


317

[SV40125(ALL)04/95]


*[SV40201(ALL)06/95] Horizontal aim adjustment

[SV40250(ALL)04/95] 1. Open the hood and locate the horizontalindicator and adjusting screw.

[SV40375(ALL)04/95] 2. Use a 4mm wrench to turn the horizontaladjusting screw until the reference mark onthe reflector extension aligns with the “0”reference mark on the horizontal indicatorwhen viewed from directly above. If thevehicle has been in an accident requiring thefront end of the vehicle to be repaired, thehorizontal indicator should be recalibratedby a servicing facility using the Taurus/SableService Manual instructions.


318

*[SV40501(ALL)06/95] Vertical aim adjustment

[SV40601(ALL)04/95] 1. With the hood open, locate the bubble levelvertical aim indicator. It is visible whenviewed from above and to the rear of theheadlamp.

[SV40650(ALL)04/95] 2. With the vehicle on a level surface, use a4mm wrench to turn the vertical aimadjustment screw (outboard screw) locatedon the back of the lamp assembly clockwiseor counterclockwise until the bubble in thespirit level is centered when viewed fromdirectly above the bubble.

[SV40725(ALL)04/95] 3. Close the hood.

[SV40750(ALL)06/95] If the vehicle is on a downward or upwardslope of not more than 1.2˚, the VHAD’s bubblelevel can be used to correct for the effects of thesurface slope, provided that the slope isaccurately known.

[SV40775(ALL)06/95] Each graduation of the bubble level represents0.19˚ of downward or upward slope. To correctfor the effects of a surface slope, turn thevertical aim adjustment screw until the bubble iscentered at a position corresponding to the slopeof the surface.

[SV40800(ALL)02/95] Each 0.1 inch difference in surface heightbetween the front and the rear wheelscorresponds to 0.053˚ of surface slope; each 0.19˚of surface slope corresponds to 0.36 inchesdifference in surface height between the frontand rear wheels.


319

% [SV40820(ALL)02/95] Replacing the High-Mount Brakelamp Bulb

[SV40830(ALL)04/95] If you have the sedan, your vehicle has abrakelamp mounted in the rear window, called ahigh-mount brakelamp. The wagon has ahigh-mount brakelamp on the outside. You mayneed to remove this lamp to replace thebrakelamp bulb.

[SV40832(ALL)11/94]


Parts of the high-mount brakelamp (sedan)

[SV40835(ALL)11/94] Sedan

*[SV40840(ALL)03/95] To remove the brakelamp:

[SV40842(ALL)11/94] 1. Remove the package tray trim.

[SV40844(ALL)11/94] 2. Push the attachment toward the rearwindow.

[SV40846(ALL)11/94] 3. Slide the brakelamp up and away from therear window to remove it from the tabs thathold it down.

[SV40849(ALL)11/94] 4. Disconnect the bulbs.


320

[SV40850(ALL)11/94] To install the brakelamp:

[SV40855(ALL)11/94] 1. Install the bulbs.

[SV40860(ALL)11/94] 2. Position the brakelamp over the tab slotsand line up the tabs with the tab slots.

[SV40865(ALL)11/94] 3. Push down and toward the rear window toengage the tabs.

[SV40870(ALL)11/94] 4. Push attachment toward the rear windowand line up the slot in the attachment withthe edge of the sheet metal hole.

[SV40875(ALL)11/94] 5. Release the attachment slot onto the sheetmetal hole.

[SV40878(ALL)02/95] 6. Replace the package tray trim.

[SV40880(ALL)11/94] Wagon

[SV40885(ALL)02/95]


Parts of the high-mount brakelamp (wagon)


321

*[SV40890(ALL)03/95] To remove the brakelamp:

[SV40895(ALL)11/94] 1. Remove the interior trim panel.

[SV40905(ALL)11/94] 2. Remove the four attachment nuts that holdthe brakelamp in place.

[SV40910(ALL)11/94] 3. Lift the whole assembly off of the vehiclefrom the outside.

[SV40915(ALL)11/94] 4. Disconnect the bulbs.

[SV40920(ALL)11/94] To install the brakelamp:

[SV40925(ALL)11/94] 1. Install the bulbs.

[SV40930(ALL)11/94] 2. Position the brakelamp into the tailgateholes.

[SV40935(ALL)11/94] 3. From the inside of the vehicle, install andtighten the four nuts that hold thebrakelamp in place.

[SV40940(ALL)11/94] 4. Install the interior trim panel.


322

% [SV40950(ALL)11/94] Using the right bulbs

% [SV40960( T)04/95]

thirty pica chart:0000327-K


323

%*[SV41000(ALL)03/95] Emission Control System[SV41100(ALL)12/95] Your vehicle is equipped with catalytic

converters which enable your vehicle to complywith applicable exhaust emission requirements.


Exhaust leaks may result in the entry ofharmful and potentially lethal fumes intothe passenger compartment. Underextreme conditions excessive exhausttemperatures could damage the fuelsystem, the interior floor covering, orother vehicle components, possiblycausing a fire.

*[SV41300(ALL)05/95] To make sure that the catalytic converter and theother emission control parts continue to workproperly:

*[SV41400(ALL)01/95] ❑Use only unleaded fuel.

*[SV41500(ALL)01/95] ❑Avoid running out of fuel.

*[SV41600(ALL)01/95] ❑Do not turn off the ignition while yourvehicle is moving, especially at high speeds.

*[SV41700(ALL)03/95] ❑Have the services listed in your MaintenanceSchedule and Record booklet performedaccording to the specified schedule.

*[SV41710(ALL)03/95] The Scheduled Maintenance Services listed in theMaintenance Schedule and Record booklet arerequired because they are considered essential tothe life and performance of your vehicle and toits emissions system.

*[SV41720(ALL)05/95] Ford strongly recommends the use of genuineFord replacement parts. If other than Ford orMotorcraft parts or Ford authorizedremanufactured parts are used for maintenancereplacements or for the service of componentsaffecting emission control, such non-Ford parts


324

should be equivalent to genuine Ford MotorCompany parts in performance and durability. Itis the owner’s responsibility to determine theequivalency of such parts. Please consult yourwarranty booklet for complete warrantyinformation.


Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle indry grass or other dry ground cover. Theemission system heats up the enginecompartment and exhaust system, whichcan start a fire.

[SV41900(ALL)04/95] Watch for fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke, lossof oil pressure, the charging system warninglight, the service engine soon light, or thetemperature warning light. These sometimesindicate that the emissions system is notworking properly.

*[SV42000(ALL)01/95] Do not make any unauthorized changes to yourvehicle or engine. Changes that cause moreunburned fuel to reach the exhaust system canincrease the temperature of the engine orexhaust system.

*[SV42100(ALL)01/95] By law, anyone who manufactures, repairs,services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, orsupervises a fleet of vehicles is not permitted tointentionally remove an emission control deviceor prevent it from working. In some of theUnited States and in Canada, vehicle ownersmay be liable if their emission control device isremoved or is prevented from working.

*[SV42200(ALL)02/92] Never use a metal exhaust collector when youservice your vehicle. If the metal collectorcontacts any of your vehicle’s plastic trim orbumper parts they could melt or deform.


325

*[SV42300(ALL)01/95] Do not drive your vehicle if it does not operateproperly. See your dealer if the engine runs onfor more than five seconds after you shut it offor if it misfires, surges, stalls, or backfires.

%*[SV42400(ALL)05/95] Information about your vehicle’s emissioncontrol system is on the Vehicle EmissionControl Information decal located on or near theengine. This decal identifies engine displacementand gives some tune-up specifications.

%*[SV42405(ALL)07/95] Readiness for Inspection/MaintenanceTesting

*[SV42410(ALL)07/95] In some localities it may become a legalrequirement to pass anInspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of theOn-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system. If thevehicle’s powertrain system or its battery hasjust been serviced, the OBD II system is reset toa not ready for I/M testing condition. Toprepare for I/M testing, the law specifies a“need for additional mixed city and highwaydriving to complete the check” of the OBD IIsystem. As soon as all of the OBD II systemchecks are successfully completed, the OBD IIsystem is set to the ready condition. The amountof driving required to reach the ready conditionvaries with individual driving patterns. Tocomplete this requirement in the minimumamount of time, refer to the OBD II Drive Cycledefined below. If the vehicle owner cannot ordoes not want to do the additional drivingrequired by law, a service center can performthis drive cycle as it would any other type ofrepair work.


326

*[SV42420(ALL)09/95] OBD II Drive Cycle

*[SV42430(ALL)06/95] The following steps must be run in the ordershown. If any steps are interrupted, repeat thepreceding step. Any safe driving mode isacceptable between steps.

*[SV42440(ALL)06/95] Always drive vehicle in safe manner accordingto traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.

*[SV42445(ALL)07/95] The engine must be warmed up and atoperating temperature before proceeding withthe drive modes of the following OBD II DriveCycle.

*[SV42450(ALL)06/95] 1. Start the engine. Drive or idle (in neutral)the vehicle for 4 minutes.

*[SV42460(ALL)06/95] 2. Idle the vehicle in drive for 40 seconds.

*[SV42465(ALL)07/95] 3. Accelerate the vehicle to 45 mph (70 km/h)at 1/4 to 1/2 throttle for 10 seconds.

*[SV42471(ALL)07/95] 4. Drive the vehicle with a steady throttle at45 mph (70 km/h) for 30 seconds.

*[SV42475(ALL)06/95] 5. Idle the vehicle in drive for 40 seconds.

*[SV42481(ALL)07/95] 6. Continue to drive the vehicle in city traffic atspeeds between 25 and 40 mph(40-60 km/h) for 15 minutes. During the 15minute drive cycle the following modes mustbe achieved:

*[SV42485(ALL)07/95] a. at least 5 stop and idle modes at 10seconds each

*[SV42491(ALL)07/95] b. acceleration from idles at 1/4 to 1/2throttle position, and

*[SV42495(ALL)07/95] c. choose 3 different speeds to do 1.5minute steady state throttle drives.


327

*[SV42500(ALL)07/95] 7. Accelerate the vehicle up to between 45 and60 mph (70-100 km/h). This should takeapproximately 5 minutes.

*[SV42505(ALL)07/95] 8. Drive vehicle and hold the throttle steady atthe selected speed between 45 and 60 mph(70-100 km/h) for approximately 5 minutes.

*[SV42510(ALL)07/95] 9. Drive the vehicle for 5 minutes at varyingspeeds between 45 and 60 mph(70-100 km/h).

*[SV42515(ALL)07/95] 10. Bring the vehicle back to idle. Idle in Drivefor 40 seconds.

*[SV42601(ALL)07/95] 11. OBD II drive cycle has been completed.Vehicle can be turned off when convenient.


328

*[SV42650(ALL)07/95] Refill Capacities, Motorcraft Parts,and Lubricant Specifications

%*[SV42700(ALL)07/95] Refill Capacities

[SV42720( T)10/95]

twenty-six pica chart:0000329-P


329

%*[SV42800(ALL)10/95] Motorcraft Parts

[SV42920( T)10/95]

twenty pica chart:0000331-M


330

%*[SV42980(ALL)05/95] Lubricant Specifications

[SV43000(ALL)10/95]

twenty-two pica chart:0000720-S


331

%*[SV44000(ALL)01/95] Vehicle Storage

*[SV44100(ALL)01/95] Maintenance Tips

*[SV44150(ALL)01/95] If you plan on storing your vehicle for anextended period of time (60 days or more), referto the following maintenance recommendationsto ensure your vehicle stays in good operatingcondition.

*[SV44200(ALL)01/95] General

*[SV44300(ALL)01/95] ❑Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place.

*[SV44400(ALL)01/95] ❑Protect from sunlight, if possible.

*[SV44500(ALL)01/95] ❑ If vehicles are stored outside, they requireregular maintenance to protect against rustand damage.

*[SV44600(ALL)01/95] Body

*[SV44700(ALL)01/95] ❑Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt,grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior surfaces,rear wheel housing and underside of frontfenders.

*[SV44800(ALL)01/95] ❑Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposedlocations.

*[SV44900(ALL)01/95] ❑Touch-up raw or primed metal to preventrust.

*[SV45000(ALL)01/95] ❑Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with athick coat of auto wax to preventdiscoloration. Re-wax as necessary when thevehicle is washed.

[SV45100(ALL)04/95] ❑Lubricate all hood, door and trunk latcheswith a light grade oil.


332

[SV45150(ALL)04/95] ❑Lubricate trunk lid or wagon liftgate hingeswith a light grade oil. (Do not lubricate hoodand door hinges.)

*[SV45200(ALL)01/95] ❑Cover interior soft trim to prevent fading.

*[SV45300(ALL)01/95] ❑Keep all rubber parts free from oil andsolvents.

%*[SV45350(ALL)01/95] Engine

*[SV45400(ALL)01/95] ❑Start engine every 15 days. Run at fast idleuntil it reaches normal operating temperature.

*[SV45500(ALL)01/95] ❑With your foot on the brake, shift through allthe gears while the engine is running.

%*[SV45600(ALL)01/95] Fuel system

%*[SV45700(ALL)07/94] ❑Fill fuel tank with high-quality unleaded fueluntil the first automatic shutoff of the fuelpump nozzle.

*[SV45900(ALL)03/95] NOTE: During extended periods of vehiclestorage (60 days or more), fuel maydeteriorate due to oxidation. This candamage rubber and other polymers inthe fuel system and may also clogsmall orifices.

*[SV46000(ALL)01/95] Ford Gas Stabilizer should be added wheneveractual or expected storage periods exceed 60days. Follow the instructions on the label. Thevehicle should then be operated at idle speed tocirculate the additive throughout the fuel system.

*[SV46100(ALL)01/95] A volatile corrosion inhibitor added to the fuelsystem will protect the fuel system’s innersurfaces from corrosion. Follow the instructionspackaged with the product.


333

%*[SV46200(ALL)01/95] Cooling system

*[SV46300(ALL)01/95] ❑Protect against freezing temperatures.

%*[SV46400(ALL)01/95] Battery

*[SV46500(ALL)01/95] ❑Check and recharge as necessary.

*[SV46600(ALL)01/95] ❑Keep connections clean and covered with alight coat of grease.

%*[SV46650(ALL)02/95] ❑ If storing your vehicle for more than 30 dayswithout recharging the battery, disconnect thebattery cables to ensure battery charge ismaintained for quick starting. NOTE: Ifbattery cables are disconnected, it will benecessary to reset any memory features (eg.radio presets).

%*[SV46700(ALL)01/95] Brakes

*[SV46800(ALL)01/95] ❑Make sure brakes and parking brake are fullyreleased.

%*[SV46900(ALL)01/95] Tires

*[SV47000(ALL)05/95] ❑Maintain recommended air pressure.

*[SV47100(ALL)01/95] Miscellaneous

*[SV47200(ALL)01/95] ❑Make sure all linkages, cables, levers andclevis pins under vehicle are covered withgrease to prevent rust.

*[SV47300(ALL)05/95] ❑Move vehicles at least 25 feet (10 m) every 15days to lubricate working parts to preventcorrosion.


334

*[SV99900( T)07/95]

thirty-six pica chart:FORDADPLN


341

[QI00750(ALL)04/95]

full page art:0001469-A

Warning label locations

File:16fcqit.exUpdate:Tue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996

342

%[QI01000(T)02/95]


Front

Exterior

View

—S

edan

/Wagon

Typ

ical

File:16fcqit.exU

pdate:T

ue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996

343

[QI01100(T)02/95]


Front

Exterior

View

SH

O

File:16fcqit.exU

pdate:T

ue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996

344

%[QI01300(T)03/95]


Rear

Exterior

View

Sed

an

File:16fcqit.exU

pdate:T

ue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996

345

%[QI01500(T)03/95]


Rear

Exterior

View

Wagon

File:16fcqit.exU

pdate:T

ue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996

346

%[QI01800(T)03/95]

fullpageart:0001061-C

En

trance

View

(Con

soleS

hift

Sh

own

—C

olum

nS

hift

Sim

ilar)

File:16fcqit.exU

pdate:T

ue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996

347

%[QI02200(T)03/95]


Driver’s

Door

File:16fcqit.exU

pdate:T

ue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996

348

%[QI02400(T)03/95]


Instru

men

tP

anel

(Colu

mn

Sh

iftS

how

n—

Con

soleS

hift

Sim

ilar)

File:16fcqit.exU

pdate:T

ue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996

349

[QI02600(T)03/95]


Instru

men

tC

luster

File:16fcqit.exU

pdate:T

ue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996

350

[QI02800(T)02/95]


Instru

men

tC

luster

SH

O

File:16fcqit.exU

pdate:T

ue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996

351

%[QI02900(T)03/95]


Tru

nk

File:16fcqit.exU

pdate:T

ue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996

352

%[QI03100(T)04/95]


Wagon

Cargo

Area

File:16fcqit.exU

pdate:T

ue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996

353

%[QI03300(T)03/95]


3.0LV

ulcan

En

gine

Com

partm

ent

File:16fcqit.exU

pdate:T

ue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996

354

%[QI03500(T)03/95]

fullpageart:0001439-A

3.0LD

uratec

En

gine

Com

partm

ent

File:16fcqit.exU

pdate:T

ue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996

355

[QI03700(T)10/95]


3.4LS

HO

En

gine

Com

partm

ent

File:16fcqit.exU

pdate:T

ue Jan 23 08:16:56 1996

Index 357

Index

A

ABS warning light(see Anti-lock brake system) . . . . . . . 81

Accessory position on the ignition . . . . . 59Additives, engine oil . . . . . . . . . . 273Air bag supplemental

restraint system. . . . . . . . . . . . . 23and child safety seats . . . . . . . . 26, 33description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31driver air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27passenger air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . 23proper seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24service and information labels . . . . . . 27tone generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30wearing safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Air cleaner filterlocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Air conditioningelectronic automatic temperature

control system . . . . . . . . . . . . 95manual heating and air

conditioning system . . . . . . . . . 93Alarm, activating remote personal . . . . 135Antenna, radio

(see Electronic sound system) . . . . . 176Antifreeze (see Engine coolant) . . . . . . 276Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203see also Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . 202warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

File:fcixt.exUpdate:Tue Jan 23 08:18:16 1996

358 Index

Anti-theft lug nuts and key. . . . . . . . 232Anti-theft system

arming the system . . . . . . . . . . 138triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Appeals (see Dispute settlement board) . . 240Assistance (see Customer assistance). . . . 237Audio system

(see Electronic sound system) . . . . . 169Autolamp system (see Headlamps) . . . . 108Automatic transaxle

driving with . . . . . . . . . . . 191, 195fluid, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298fluid, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . 296fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . . . . 328fluid, specification . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Axlelubricant specifications. . . . . . . . . 330refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

B

Backing up . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193, 198Basic vehicle warranty . . . . . . . . . . . 4Battery

acid, treating emergencies . . . . . . . 217battery saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113charging system warning light . . . . . . 74disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282jumping a disabled battery . . . . . . . 217proper disposal, recycling . . . . . . . 283replacement, specifications . . . . . . . 329servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282when storing your vehicle . . . . . . . 333

Brake fluidbrake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . 73checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 298description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330


Index 359

Brakelamphigh-mount brakelamp . . . . . . . . 319lamp out warning light . . . . . . . . . 87

Brakesadjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202anti-lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203anti-lock brake system (ABS)

warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . 81applying the brakes . . . . . . . . . . 202brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . 73fluid, checking and adding . . . . . . 298fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . . . . 298fluid, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 330front disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . 298new brake linings. . . . . . . . . . . . 5noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215when storing your vehicle . . . . . . . 333

Brake-shift interlock . . . . . . . . . 192, 196Break-in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Brights (high beams) . . . . . . . . . 76, 115Built-in child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Built-in child seat, cleaning. . . . . . . . . 57Bulbs, replacing

headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313high-mount brakelamp . . . . . . . . 319specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322


360 Index

C

Canada, customer assistance . . . . . . . 245Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan

(CAMVAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Capacities for refilling fluids . . . . . . . 328Carbon monoxide in exhaust . . . . . . . . 68Cargo cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Cargo net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Car seats for children

(see Child safety seats) . . . . . . . . . 33Cassette tape player (see Electronic

sound system) . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Catalytic converter. . . . . . . . . . . . 323CD player (see Electronic sound system). . 182Chains, tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Changing a tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Charging system warning light . . . . . . . 74Childproof locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Child safety restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 31

child safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . 57child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Child safety seatsand air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 33attaching with tether straps . . . . . . . 43automatic locking mode (retractor) . . 14, 33built-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35in rear outboard seat . . . . . . . . . . 35tether anchorage hardware . . . . . . . . 44

Chimeheadlamps on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77key in ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Cleaning your vehiclebuilt-in child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . 57CD player and discs. . . . . . . . . . 187chrome and aluminum parts . . . . . . . 7engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . 264exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6


Index 361

Cleaning your vehicle (continued)exterior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 108fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 91interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151interior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 113mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7polishing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 105rustproofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108upholstery and interior trim . . . . . . 151washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Climate control systemelectronic automatic

temperature control. . . . . . . . . . 95manual heating and air conditioning . . . 93

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Cold engine starting. . . . . . . . . . . . 62Combination lap and shoulder belts . . . . 12Compact disc player (see Electronic

sound system) . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Console, description . . . . . . . . . . . 156Controls

instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 91mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153steering column . . . . . . . . . . . 115


362 Index

Coolant (see Engine coolant)checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 276drain and flush . . . . . . . . . . . . 280preparing for storage . . . . . . . . . 333refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 328specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Cupholder(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Customer Assistance Center, Ford (U.S.) . . 239Customer Assistance Centre,

Ford of Canada . . . . . . . . . . 239, 245

D

Dashboard (see Instrument panel) . . . . . . 91Daytime running light system . . . . . . 107Defects, reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Defrost

rear window and side view mirrors. . . 104windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 103

Dipstickautomatic transaxle fluid. . . . . . . . 296engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . 300

Disabled vehicle (see Towing) . . . . . . 233Dispute Settlement Board . . . . . . . . 240Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 125door ajar warning light . . . . . . . . . 77lubricant specifications. . . . . . . . . 330

Driving under special conditionsbad weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206heavy load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208high speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290high water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208slippery roads . . . . . . . . . . . . 206tips for safe driving . . . . . . . . . . 206towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . 211


Index 363

E

Electrical systemfuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303operating when the engine is off . . . . . 59relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Electronic sound systemradio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . 177tuning the radio . . . . . . . . . . . 173warranty and service information . . . 190

Electronic stereo cassette radio(see Electronic sound system) . . . . . 172

Electronic stereo radio (see Electronic soundsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Emergencies, roadsideassistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237battery acid spills . . . . . . . . . . . 217fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Emergency brake (parking brake) . . . . . 205Emission control system

catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . 323emissions warranty . . . . . . . . . 4, 323

Enginedoes not start . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 65fuel pump shut-off switch . . . . . . . . 65preparing to start . . . . . . . . . . . . 61refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 328service points . . . . . . . . . . . . 260starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62starting after a collision . . . . . . . . . 65storing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . 332

Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Engine coolant

checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 276checking hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . 277disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280drain and flush . . . . . . . . . . . . 280preparing for storage . . . . . . . . . 333


364 Index

Engine coolant (continued)proper solution . . . . . . . . . . . . 278recovery reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . 277refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 328specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . 82Engine fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Engine oil

changing oil and oil filter . . . . . . . 275checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 273dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . 75filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 329refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 328specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330synthetic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273“break-in” oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Entry system, keyless . . . . . . . . . . 128Exhaust fumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Extended Service Plan, Ford . . . . . . . . 4

F

Fan, engine fan, avoiding injury . . . . . 256Flashers, hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Flashing the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Flat tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Fluid refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . 328


Index 365

Ford Customer Assistance Center . . . . . 239Ford Dispute Settlement Board . . . . . . 240Ford Extended Service Plan . . . . . . . . 4Ford Motor Company of Canada . . . . . 245Ford of Canada Customer

Assistance Centre . . . . . . . . . . . 245Foreign registration . . . . . . . . . . . 247French owner guides, how to obtain . . . . 3Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

calculating fuel economy . . . . . . . 270capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328choosing the right fuel . . . . . . . . 266comparisons with EPA fuel

economy estimates . . . . . . . . . 271filling your vehicle with fuel. . . . . . 264filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 329fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82improving fuel economy . . . . . . . 271octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267running out of fuel . . . . . . . . . . 269safety information relating to

automotive fuels . . . . . . . . . . 268storing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . 332treating emergencies . . . . . . . . . 268

Fuel cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Fuel filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . 329Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Fuel pump shut-off switch

engine does not start . . . . . . . . . . 65starting after a collision . . . . . . . . . 65

Fuse panelsinstrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . 304power distribution box . . . . . . . . 308


366 Index

Fuseschecking and replacing . . . . . . . . 311

G

Gas cap (see Fuel cap) . . . . . . . . . . 264Gas mileage (see Fuel economy) . . . . . 270Gasoline (see Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . 264Gauges, Mechanical

engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . 82fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208driving with a heavy load . . . . . . . 208location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Gearshiftautomatic operation . . . . . . . . 192, 195column-mounted . . . . . . . . . . . 197console-mounted . . . . . . . . . . . 198locking the gearshift. . . . . . . . . . . 59positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192, 195shifting the gears . . . . . . . . . 192, 195shift-lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192, 196

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208driving with a heavy load . . . . . . . 208location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208


Index 367

H

Hazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Headlamps

aiming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316autolamp system . . . . . . . . . . . 108bulb specification . . . . . . . . . . . 322checking alignment . . . . . . . . . . 313cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108daytime running lights . . . . . . . . 107flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 313turning on and off . . . . . . . . . . 106warning chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Heated mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Heating

electronic automatic temperaturecontrol system . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

manual heating and airconditioning system . . . . . . . . . 93

High beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

High-mount brakelamp,replacing the bulb . . . . . . . . . . 319

Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Hood

latch location . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259lubrication specifications. . . . . . . . 330release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258working under the hood . . . . . . . 256

Horn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Hoses, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277


368 Index

I

Identification Number, Vehicle (VIN) . . . 240Idle, relearning . . . . . . . . . . . 221, 282Ignition

chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60positions of the ignition . . . . . . . . . 59removing the key . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Infant seats (see Safety seats) . . . . . . . . 33Instrument Cluster. . . . . . . . . . . 71, 84Instrument panel

lighting up panel and interior . . . . . 110location of components . . . . . . . . . 92

Interval wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

J

Jackpositioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Jump-starting your vehicleattaching cables . . . . . . . . . . . . 219disconnecting cables . . . . . . . . . . 221

K

Keyless entry systemlocking and unlocking doors . . . . . . 130programming entry code. . . . . . . . 129

Keyskey in ignition chime . . . . . . . . . . 60positions of the ignition . . . . . . . . . 59removing from the ignition . . . . . . . 60stuck in lock position . . . . . . . . . . 59


Index 369

L

Lampsautolamp delay system . . . . . . . . 108bulb replacement specifications chart . . 322daytime running light system . . . . . 107dome lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111flashing the lamps . . . . . . . . . . 116hazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . 118headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106high beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115illuminated mirrors . . . . . . . . . . 155instrument panel, dimming . . . . . . 110interior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 110map lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Lane change indicator (see Turn signal) . . 115Lap belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Lights, warning and indicator

air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77anti-lock brakes (ABS). . . . . . . . . . 81brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73charging system . . . . . . . . . . . . 74door ajar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77engine oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 75hazard warning light . . . . . . . . . 118high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76lamp out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87low fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80low washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . 87oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73service engine soon . . . . . . . . . . . 78speed control (see cruise control) . . . . . 81turn signal indicator . . . . . . . . . . 81


370 Index

Load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208GAWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . . 330Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 158Luggage rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Lug nuts

anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227tightening sequence . . . . . . . . . . 229

Lumbar support pad. . . . . . . . . . . 149

M

Maintenance schedule and record(see separate Maintenance Scheduleand Record booklet) . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Maintenance (see Servicing) . . . . . . . 255Master cylinder, brakes . . . . . . . . . 298Mileage, calculating fuel economy. . . . . 270Mirrors

heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104side view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 153vanity mirror, illuminated . . . . . . . 155

Moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Motorcraft parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

N

National Highway TrafficSafety Administration . . . . . . . . . 244

New vehicle break-in . . . . . . . . . . . 5


Index 371

O

Octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Odometer

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Oil (see Engine oil) . . . . . . . . . . . 272Oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273On-board diagnostic (OBD II) system . . . 325Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194, 199Overseas offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

P

Panic alarm feature, remoteentry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Parking brakeoperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Parts (see Motorcraft Parts) . . . . . . . 329PCV valve, specifications . . . . . . . . 329Phone, cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Power distribution box (see Fuses) . . . . 308Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Power features

door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . 149mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Power steeringdipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301driving with power steering . . . . . . 201fluid, checking and adding . . . . . . 300fluid, refill capacity . . . . . . . . . . 328fluid, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 330servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201


372 Index

R

Radio (see Electronic sound systems) . . . 169Rear window

defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Refill capacities for fluids . . . . . . . . 328Regulations, National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration . . . . . . . . . 244Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303Remote entry system

arming and disarming theanti-theft system . . . . . . . . . . 136

locking/unlocking doors . . . . . . . . 134panic alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135replacement/additional transmitters. . . 137replacing the batteries . . . . . . . . . 136

Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . 244Restraints, safety (see Safety restraints)

adult. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Ride control, Semi-Active. . . . . . . . . 202Roadside assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 237Roadside emergencies . . . . . . . . . . 217Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Rotating the tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

S

Safe driving tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Safety belts (see Safety restraints) . . . . . . 9Safety chains, when towing a trailer . . . . 214Safety Compliance Certification Label . . . 208Safety defects, reporting . . . . . . . . . 244Safety information relating to

automotive fuels . . . . . . . . . . . 268


Index 373

Safety restraintsadjusting the safety belts . . . . 12, 15, 21automatic locking mode . . . . . . . . . 14center front lap belt . . . . . . . . . . . 21center rear lap belt . . . . . . . . . . . 21cleaning the safety belts . . . . . . . . . 23extension assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 22for adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31for infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145lap and shoulder belts . . . . . . . . . 12lap belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23proper use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23warning light and chime . . . . . . . . 73

Safety seats for childrenand air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 33attaching with tether straps . . . . . . . 43automatic locking mode (retractor) . . 14, 33in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35in rear outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . 35tether anchorage hardware . . . . . . . 43

Seat belts (see Safety restraints). . . . . . . 9Seats

adjusting the seat, manual . . . . . . . 147adjusting the seats, power . . . . . . . 148child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 33cleaning upholstery . . . . . . . . . . 151head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . 145lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . 149split-folding rear seat . . . . . . . . . 149

Semi-Active ride control . . . . . . . . . 202Serial number (VIN). . . . . . . . . . . 240Service concerns . . . . . . . . . . . . 238


374 Index

Servicing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 255precautions when servicing . . . . . . 256servicing when you tow . . . . . . . . 216

Shift-lock system . . . . . . . . . . 192, 196Shift positions

(see Gearshift) . . . . . . . . . . 193, 197Shoulder and lap belts

(see Safety restraints) . . . . . . . . . . 12Shoulder belts

(see Safety restraints) . . . . . . . . . . 12Side mirrors

adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Sliding moon roof (see Moon roof) . . . . 144Snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . 294Spare tire

changing the tire . . . . . . . . . . . 222conventional spare . . . . . . . . . . 223finding the spare . . . . . . . . . . . 223removing the spare tire . . . . . . . . 223storing the flat tire . . . . . . . . . . 223temporary spare . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Spark plugs, specifications . . . . . . . . 329Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . 206Specification chart, lubricants . . . . . . . 330Speed control (see cruise control)

accelerating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123tap up/tap down . . . . . . . . . . . 123turning off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124when towing a trailer . . . . . . . 122, 216

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Starting your vehicle

preparing to start your vehicle . . . . . . 61starting a cold engine . . . . . . . . . . 62starting after a collision . . . . . . . . . 65starting a warm engine . . . . . . . . . 62starting your vehicle if the battery

is disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217


Index 375

Steering, power . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Steering wheel

horn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59speed controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 120tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Storage compartmentscargo area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160cargo net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161center console . . . . . . . . . . . . 156locking storage . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 331Sunroof (moon roof). . . . . . . . . . . 144Sun visor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Supplemental air bag readiness light . . . . 77Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . 23

T

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Tail lamps, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . 108Temperature control (see Climate control) . . 93Tether anchor installation

(see Child restraints) . . . . . . . . . . 43Tilt steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . 119Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222checking the pressure . . . . . . . . . 288cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295inspection and maintenance . . . . . . 288replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . 294spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222storing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . 333tire grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293wear bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Towing a trailer (see Trailer towing) . . . 211


376 Index

Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 233using wheel dollies . . . . . . . . . . 233with a tow truck . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Trailer towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211calculating maximum trailer weight . . . 209safety chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216trailer brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215trailer lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Transaxleautomatic operation . . . . . . . . 192, 195fluid, checking and adding

(automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . . . . 328lubricant specifications. . . . . . . . . 330

Trip odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Tune-up specifications (VECI). . . . . . . 325Turn signal

indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

U

Used engine oil, disposal . . . . . . . . . 275

V

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Variable interval wipers . . . . . . . . . 117VECI (Vehicle Emission Control Information)

decal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . 240Vehicle loading

automatic transaxles . . . . . . . . . . 209calculating the load . . . . . . . . . . 209understanding loading information . . . 208


Index 377

Vehicle storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331Ventilating your vehicle

(see Climate control) . . . . . . . . . 102Viscosity (see Engine oil) . . . . . . . . 273Visor (see Sun visor) . . . . . . . . . . 154

W

Wagoncargo cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162cargo net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161liftgate window wiper and washer . . . 105luggage rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Warm engine, starting . . . . . . . . . . . 62Warning chimes

headlamps on . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77key in ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Warning lights (see Lights). . . . . . . . . 71Warranties

basic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Warranty Information Booklet . . . . . . . 4Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

rear window reservoir . . . . . . . . 284reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Weight limits (GAWR, GVWR) . . . . . . 208Wheel dollies (see Towing). . . . . . . . 233


378 Index

Wheelsanti-theft lugnuts . . . . . . . . . . . 232cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229inspection and maintenance . . . . . . 288lug nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227ornaments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Windowsliftgate window . . . . . . . . . . . . 159one-touch down. . . . . . . . . . . . 143power windows, operating . . . . . . . 142rear, defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Windshielddefrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 103washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Windshield washer fluid and wiperschecking and adding fluid . . . . . . . 283checking and replacing wiper blades . . 285liftgate reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . 284low washer fluid light . . . . . . . . . . 87operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283variable interval wipers . . . . . . . . 117

Windshield wipers and washer . . . . . . 116Wrecker towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233


380

Service StationInformation

[GS00500( T)10/95]

twenty-two pica chart:0001114-D

File:17fcgst.exUpdate:Tue Jan 23 08:18:03 1996

Just Give Me The Damn Manual*[PI00560(ALL)05/95] Table of Contents Introductory Information...

Documents

Transcript of Just Give Me The Damn Manual*[PI00560(ALL)05/95] Table of Contents Introductory Information...